Kyocera Mits KM 6030 - KM 8030-Service MANUAL
Kyocera Mits KM 6030 - KM 8030-Service MANUAL
Kyocera Mits KM 6030 - KM 8030-Service MANUAL
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Apr ’06
3FB70764
Revision 4
CAUTION
ATTENTION
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. .............................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. ............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .......
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ...............................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ...........................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is acciden-
tally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi-
ately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical
attention. ......................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .....................................................................................................................
2.Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ...............
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .......................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. .....................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. .............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ..............................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...........................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ....................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. .....................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. .............................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ........
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ....................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. ...................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: .....................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. .......................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme-
diately. ............................................................................................................................................
3.Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. .....................................................................................
2FB/2FC
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-3
(1) Copier................................................................................................................................................1-1-3
(2) Operation panel.................................................................................................................................1-1-5
1-1-3 Cross section view ..................................................................................................................................1-1-6
1-1-4 Drive system ...........................................................................................................................................1-1-7
(1) Drive system 1 (Optical section)........................................................................................................1-1-7
(2) Drive system 2 (Cassette paper feed)...............................................................................................1-1-8
(3) Drive system 3 (Deck paper feed).....................................................................................................1-1-9
(4) Drive system 4 (Deck lift) ..................................................................................................................1-1-9
(5) Drive system 5 (Vertical paper feed) ...............................................................................................1-1-10
(6) Drive system 6 (MP tray paper feed)...............................................................................................1-1-11
(7) Drive system 7 (Paper conveying) ..................................................................................................1-1-12
(8) Drive system 8 (Drive motor and developing motor drive trains) ....................................................1-1-13
(9) Drive system 9 (Transfer motor, fuser motor drive train).................................................................1-1-14
(10) Drive system 10 (Toner motor drive train).......................................................................................1-1-16
(11) Drive system 11 (Document processor) ..........................................................................................1-1-17
1-3 Installation
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................1-3-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .....................................................................................................................1-3-12
1-3-3 Installing the key counter (option) .........................................................................................................1-3-13
1-3-4 Installing the document finisher (option) ...............................................................................................1-3-15
1-3-5 Installing the side feeder (option)..........................................................................................................1-3-24
1-3-6 Installing the printer kit (option).............................................................................................................1-3-28
1-3-7 Installing the scanner kit (option) ..........................................................................................................1-3-31
1-3-8 Installing the security kit (option)...........................................................................................................1-3-33
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-5-1
2FB/2FC-4
(31)
The LSU fan motor does not operate. .............................................................................................1-5-62
(32)
Developing fan motor 1 or 2 does not operate. ...............................................................................1-5-63
(33)
The image formation fan motor does not operate. ..........................................................................1-5-63
(34)
The developing duct fan motor does not operate............................................................................1-5-63
(35)
PWB fan motor 1 or 2 does not operate..........................................................................................1-5-64
(36)
The power source fan motor does not operate. ..............................................................................1-5-64
(37)
The feedshift fan motor does not operate. ......................................................................................1-5-64
(38)
The duplex fan motor does not operate. .........................................................................................1-5-64
(39)
The shield box fan motor does not operate.....................................................................................1-5-64
(40)
The MP solenoid does not operate. ................................................................................................1-5-65
(41)
The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ........................................................................................1-5-65
(42)
The fuser web solenoid does not operate. ......................................................................................1-5-65
(43)
The duplex feedshift solenoid does not operate..............................................................................1-5-65
(44)
The duplex switchback solenoid does not operate..........................................................................1-5-65
(45)
The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ...............................................................................................1-5-65
(46)
The exposure lamp does not turn on...............................................................................................1-5-66
(47)
The exposure lamp does not turn off...............................................................................................1-5-66
(48)
The fuser heater lamp M, S or L does not turn on...........................................................................1-5-66
(49)
The fuser heater lamp M, S or L does not turn off...........................................................................1-5-66
(50)
No main charging. ...........................................................................................................................1-5-66
(51)
No developing bias is output. ..........................................................................................................1-5-66
(52)
No transfer bias is output. ...............................................................................................................1-5-67
(53)
The original size is not detected......................................................................................................1-5-67
(54)
The original size is not detected correctly. ......................................................................................1-5-67
(55)
The touch panel keys do not work...................................................................................................1-5-67
(56)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in cassette 1. ........1-5-67
(57)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in cassette 2. ........1-5-67
(58)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in cassette 3. ........1-5-67
(59)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in cassette 4. ........1-5-68
(60)
The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the MP tray. .....1-5-68
(61)
The size of paper in cassette 3 is not displayed correctly. ..............................................................1-5-68
(62)
The size of paper in cassette 4 is not displayed correctly. ..............................................................1-5-68
(63)
The size of paper on the MP tray is not displayed correctly............................................................1-5-69
(64)
A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fuser section is indicated
when the main power switch is turned on. ......................................................................................1-5-69
(65) The message requesting cover to be closed is displayed when the front cover is closed. .............1-5-69
(66) Others..............................................................................................................................................1-5-69
DP
(1) The original feed motor does not operate. ......................................................................................1-5-70
(2) The original conveying motor does not operate. .............................................................................1-5-70
(3) The original registration motor does not operate.............................................................................1-5-70
(4) The DP lift motor does not operate. ................................................................................................1-5-70
(5) The DP fan motor does not operate. ...............................................................................................1-5-70
(6) The CIS does not turn on. ...............................................................................................................1-5-71
(7) The CIS does not turn off. ...............................................................................................................1-5-71
(8) A message indication cover open is displayed when the DP is closed correctly. ...........................1-5-71
(9) The size of original is not displayed correctly..................................................................................1-5-71
(10) An original jams when the main power switch is turned on.............................................................1-5-71
1-5-5 Mechanical problems ............................................................................................................................1-5-72
Copier
(1) No primary paper feed.....................................................................................................................1-5-72
(2) No secondary paper feed. ...............................................................................................................1-5-72
(3) Skewed paper feed. ........................................................................................................................1-5-72
(4) The scanner does not travel............................................................................................................1-5-72
(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ..................................................................................1-5-72
(6) Paper jams. .....................................................................................................................................1-5-72
(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path.......................................................................................1-5-72
(8) Abnormal noise is heard..................................................................................................................1-5-73
DP
(1) No primary original feed. .................................................................................................................1-5-74
(2) No secondary paper feed. ...............................................................................................................1-5-74
(3) Originals jam. ..................................................................................................................................1-5-74
2FB/2FC-3
2-4 Appendixes
Chart of image adjustment procedures...................................................................................................2-4-1
Image quality...........................................................................................................................................2-4-4
Maintenance parts list .............................................................................................................................2-4-5
Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-7
Maintenance kits ...................................................................................................................................2-4-13
Parts kits ...............................................................................................................................................2-4-14
Wiring diagram No.1 .............................................................................................................................2-4-15
Wiring diagram No.2 .............................................................................................................................2-4-16
Wiring diagram No.3 .............................................................................................................................2-4-17
Wiring diagram No.4 .............................................................................................................................2-4-18
Wiring diagram No.5 .............................................................................................................................2-4-19
Wiring diagram No.6 .............................................................................................................................2-4-20
Wiring diagram No.7 .............................................................................................................................2-4-21
Wiring diagram No.8 .............................................................................................................................2-4-22
Wiring diagram No.9 .............................................................................................................................2-4-23
Wiring diagram No.10 ...........................................................................................................................2-4-24
2FB/2FC
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications
Copier
Type ................................................ Console
Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals.......................................... Sheets, books and three-dimensional objects
Maximum size: A3/11" x 17"
Original feed system ....................... Fixed
Copy paper ..................................... Weight
Cassette: 60 - 160 g/m2
MP tray: 45 - 200 g/m2
Types
Cassette: Plain paper, colored paper
MP tray: Plain paper, special paper (colored paper, transparencies, etc.) and enve-
lopes (when using the printer function only)
Copy sizes ...................................... Cassette
Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum: A5R/5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
MP tray
Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum: A6R/5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
During duplex copying
Maximum: A3/11" x 17"
Minimum: A5R/5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
Magnification ratios......................... Manual mode: 25 - 400%, 1% increments
Auto copy mode: Fixed ratios
Copying speed................................ At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
80 cpm
A4/11" x 8 1/2": 80 sheets/min.
A4R/8 1/2" x 11": 54 sheets/min.
A3/11" x 17": 40 sheets/min.
B4 (257 x 364 mm)/8 1/2" x 14": 50 sheets/min.
B5: 80 sheets/min.
B5R: 58 sheets/min.
When the document processor is used (at 100% magnification):
A4/11" x 8 1/2": 80 sheets/min.
60 cpm
A4/11" x 8 1/2": 60 sheets/min.
A4R/8 1/2" x 11": 43 sheets/min.
A3/11" x 17": 31 sheets/min.
B4 (257 x 364 mm)/8 1/2" x 14": 37 sheets/min.
B5: 60 sheets/min.
B5R: 47 sheets/min.
When the document processor is used (at 100% magnification):
A4/11" x 8 1/2": 60 sheets/min.
First copy time ................................ 2.9 s or less (80 cpm)/3.6 s or less (60 cpm) (A4/11" x 8 1/2", 100% magnification,
cassette 1)
Warm-up time ................................. 30 s
Recovery from low power mode: 10 s
Recovery from sleep mode: 30 s
(room temperature 23 °C/73.4 °F, 50%RH)
Paper feed system.......................... Automatic feed (four cassettes)
Capacity: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2
500 sheets (80 g/m2)/525 sheets (75 g/m2) x 2
Manual feed
Capacity:
MP tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multiple copying .............................. 1 - 9999 sheets
Photoconductor............................... a-Si (drum diameter 84 mm)
Charging system............................. Double positive corona charging
Recording system ........................... Semiconductor laser
1-1-1
2FB/2FC
1-1-2
2FB/2FC
(1) Copier
13 15
14 16
17
19
18
20
1 2 3
21
8
10
9
5 12
4 11
6
7
Figure 1-1-1
1-1-3
2FB/2FC
23 24 25 22 23
26
27
28
29
31 30
37
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
41
40
Figure 1-1-2
1-1-4
2FB/2FC
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 19
16
4 14 15 17 18 20
Figure 1-1-3
1-1-5
2FB/2FC
()
+ $
&
%
(-
! " #
(,
'
Light path
Paper and original path
Figure 1-1-4
1-1-6
2FB/2FC
!
(- "
#
+ %
* '
$ &
Figure 1-1-5
1-1-7
2FB/2FC
"& $
*
%
'
() (, #
+
(-
!
Figure 1-1-6
1-1-8
2FB/2FC
(. " & (4 ()
(/ +
(2 (3 ! (-
(,
# % $
(1 (0 * '
Figure 1-1-7
* *
% $ % $
& &
" "
' '
Figure 1-1-8
1-1-9
2FB/2FC
()
(,
(-
+
#
!
"
&
* %
'
Figure 1-1-9
1-1-10
2FB/2FC
'
Figure 1-1-10
1. MP feed motor
2. Gear 54 MP tray
3. Gear 54 MP tray
4. Gear 44 MP tray
1-1-11
2FB/2FC
+
&
"
(- *
# !
$ ' %
() (1
(,
(4
Figure 1-1-11
1-1-12
2FB/2FC
(8) Drive system 8 (Drive motor and developing motor drive trains)
(. (-
(3 (0
" $
! * (2
(,
(1
#
&
% +
()
(4
'
Figure 1-1-12
$ (,
'
(- &
%
+
*! "
#
1-1-13
2FB/2FC
(.
(, "
(- &
(0 #
(3
(2
*
(1 $
(4 ! +
'
()
53
52
5)
(/ % 54
51 5- 5,
Figure 1-1-14
1-1-14
2FB/2FC
#
%
(,
! + (-
$ ' * " &
(1
(4
()
%
* $
& '
()
"
(, !
(-
+
#
1-1-15
2FB/2FC
$
'
&
"
% *
Figure 1-1-17
1. Toner motor
2. Gear Z70/Z16S
3. Gear Z56S/Z20S
4. Gear 38
5. Gear joint CONT
6. Coupling container
1-1-16
2FB/2FC
+
(1 (4 (, # (3 (0
%
" ! (.
'
(/
(2
() 51 5-
(-
52 5)
& 5,
$
54
* 6) 6,
53
50
5. 5/
6-
61
62 60 7,
7-
64
6/
63
6.
Figure 1-1-18
1-1-17
2FB/2FC
1-2Handling Precautions
1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
• When removing the drum, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
• Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20 °C/-4 °F and 40 °C/104 °F and at a relative humidity not
higher than 90% RH.
Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
• Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
Machine front: 1000 mm/39 3/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/3 15/16"
Machine right: 700 mm/27 9/16" Machine left: 600 mm/23 5/8"
1-2-1
2FB/2FC
60
30
1-2-2
2FB/2FC-4
1-3Installation
Start
Unpacking.
1-3-1
2FB/2FC-2.0
Unpacking.
1-3-2
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-3-2
1-3-3
2FB/2FC
Slope
Slope
Figure 1-3-3
1-3-4
2FB/2FC
Tapes
Tapes
DP sheet
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tapes
Tapes
Tapes
Figure 1-3-4
2. Remove four tapes, two pins for light source Pin for
unit 1 and pin for light source unit 2. light source unit 2
Pin for
light source unit 1
Pin for
Tapes light source unit 1 Tape
Figure 1-3-5
1-3-5
2FB/2FC
3. 120 V specifications
Remove the two tapes of power cord.
230 V specifications
Remove the tape of power cord.
Tape
Tapes
Figure 1-3-6
Tape
Rear sheet
Figure 1-3-7
Sheet
Tape
Tape
Figure 1-3-8
1-3-6
2FB/2FC
Tape
Deck spacer
Figure 1-3-9
Tape
Figure 1-3-10
Screws
Figure 1-3-11
1-3-7
2FB/2FC-4
Tape
Figure 1-3-13
Figure 1-3-13
1-3-8
2FB/2FC-3
Figure 1-3-14
Toner container
Figure 1-3-15
1-3-9
2FB/2FC-4
1. Verify levelness at the four coners of the contact glass using a level gauge, and adjust the level
bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness.
Power cord
Figure 1-3-16
M3 x 8
1. Load paper in the cassette. screws
* When fixing the paper width guides position
of cassette 3 or 4, use M3 x 8 screws sup-
plied with the machine.
2. Make test copies.
Figure 1-3-17
1-3-10
2FB/2FC-2.0
MP label
Figure 1-3-18
DP labels
Main power switch label
DP label
Figure 1-3-19
Guide case
Figure 1-3-20
1-3-11
2FB/2FC-3
1-3-12
2FB/2FC-3
• Before installing the key counter, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp
is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard
disk.
Procedure
1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using the two screws and nut.
2. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws, and attach the key counter retainer to the
mount using the two screws.
Nut M3 (C2303000)
Key counter cover
(2A360010)
M4 x 6 screw (B4304060)
Figure 1-3-21
1-3-13
2FB/2FC-3
3. Cut out the aperture plate on the middle right cover using nippers.
4. Pass the 4-pin connector of the key counter through the apertures in the key counter cover retainer and middle right
cover, and insert into the 4-pin connector inside the machine.
5. Seat the projection of the key counter cover retainer in the aperture in the middle right cover, and fasten them both to
the machine using the two screws.
6. Fit the key counter cover with the key counter socket assembly inserted to the key counter cover retainer on the
machine using the screw.
Aperture plate
4-pin connector Middle right cover
M4 x 30 screw
(B1B54300)
M4 x 20 screw M4 x 6 screw
(7BB100420H/ (B4104060)
BB040740)
Figure 1-3-22
1-3-14
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
Connecting plate
1. Install the connecting plate using the two M4
x 20 TP tap tight S screws on the left cover.
Left cover
M4 x 20 TP tap
tight S screws
Figure 1-3-23
M3 x 14 tap
tight S screws
Grounding
plates A
Figure 1-3-24
1-3-15
2FB/2FC-4
Sponge
Figure 1-3-25
Grounding
plates B
M4 x 8 tap
tight S screws
Figure 1-3-26
Screw
Hooks
Connecting lever
Figure 1-3-27
1-3-16
2FB/2FC
Screw
Connecting rail
Figure 1-3-28
Connecting plate
Hooks
Figure 1-3-29
Figure 1-3-30
1-3-17
2FB/2FC-4
Screw
Figure 1-3-31
Tape
Blue screws
Blue screws
Figure 1-3-32
Tape
Figure 1-3-33
1-3-18
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-3-34
Tapes
Figure 1-3-35
Staple cartridges
Figure 1-3-36
1-3-19
2FB/2FC
Hole
Pins
Figure 1-3-37
Figure 1-3-38
Signal cable
Figure 1-3-39
1-3-20
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-3-40
Signal
cable
Clamp
M3 x 10 tap
tight S screw
Figure 1-3-41
1-3-21
2FB/2FC
a b
Figure 1-3-42
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 1-3-43
Screws
Figure 1-3-44
1-3-22
2FB/2FC
2 1
Figure 1-3-45
[Correcting centerfold-stapling]
1. Print test copies using various paper types.
Configure the printer for saddle stapling and
output to the main tray.
Supported paper sizes for stapling: A3, A4R,
B4, 11" x 17", 8 1/2" x 11", 8 1/2" x 14"
2. Unfold the copied paper that has been cen-
terfold-stapled, with the inside faced down
as shown in the illustration. Check that the
paper is stapled at the center.
3. If the staple position is off, enter mainte-
nance mode and run U248 to perform the
following adjustment for each paper size.
4. Select [SADDLE STAPLE ADJUST].
5. Set the setting value for each paper size.
If the paper is stapled too far toward the
paper eject side (as shown in a in the fig-
ure), decrease the setting value.
If the paper is stapled too far toward the
paper feed side (as shown in b in the figure),
increase the setting value.
Setting range: -10 to +10
Initial setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 moves the stapling
position by approximately 0.55 mm (refer-
ence value). a b
6. Exit the maintenance mode.
Figure 1-3-46
1-3-23
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Cut out the four hole covers from the right
cover of the machine.
Use nippers to trim the burrs from the holes.
2. Open the right cover.
Hole covers
Right cover
Figure 1-3-47
Right cover
Figure 1-3-48
1-3-24
2FB/2FC
Switch contact
plate
Right rear
lower cover
Figure 1-3-49
6. Pull out the fixing plate of the side feeder, Right cover
and insert it into the bottom of the machine's
right cover.
7. Open the right cover.
Fixing plate
Figure 1-3-50
8. Install two M4 x 6 TP screws in the long
holes of the fixing plate.
Align the V-groove of the fixing plate with the
center of the guide of the machine.
M4 x 6 TP screw M4 x 6 TP screw
Figure 1-3-51
1-3-25
2FB/2FC
Anchor bracket
Figure 1-3-52
Clamp
Signal cable
Figure 1-3-53
1-3-26
2FB/2FC
Fixing plate
Figure 1-3-54
1-3-27
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
Install the printer board.
1. Remove three screws and then remove the
cover.
Cover
Screws
Figure 1-3-56
Screws
Figure 1-3-57
Printer
network kit
Pins
Pins
Figure 1-3-58
1-3-28
2FB/2FC
[Format].
HDD
cover
Figure 1-3-59
Installing the optional serial interface
1. Remove the five screws and the two pins, remove the printer system, and remove the cover.
2. Plug the 10-pin connector of the serial interface into YC8 of the printer board, and pass the
power cord through cutout in the board.
3. Secure the serial interface to the printer board using the two pins.
4. Slide in the printer board along the rails, and then secure it with the five screws.
Take care that the power cord does not come into contact the frame edge.
Printer 10-pin
board connector
Screws
Screws
Cover
Pins
Screws
Serial
interface Screws Printer board
Figure 1-3-60
Figure 1-3-61
1-3-29
2FB/2FC
M3 screw
Clamp
Figure 1-3-62
1-3-30
2FB/2FC-2.0
Screws Screws
Screws
Figure 1-3-63
Right
sequence
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-3-64
Screws
Figure 1-3-65
1-3-31
2FB/2FC
M3 screw
Clamp
Figure 1-3-66
1-3-32
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Remove the nine screws, and then remove Rear middle cover
the rear middle cover.
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-3-67
Right
sequence
cover
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-3-68
1-3-33
2FB/2FC-2.0
Power cable
Security
board
Board support
Figure 1-3-69
6. Plug the machine into a power outlet, and Hard disk icon
turn on its main power switch.
7. Confirm that the hard disk icon is displayed
on (the right upper corner of) the touch
Paper Size Set
panel.
A4
100%
Merge copy
Margin/
Imag.Shift
None
Erase
Auto Staple Mode
Exposure Left Top
Exposure Staple
Mode /Punch
Program
Figure 1-3-70
1-3-34
2FB/2FC
Start
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
End
1-4-1
2FB/2FC-3
*Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021
1-4-2
2FB/2FC-3
1-4-3
2FB/2FC-3
*Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021
1-4-4
2FB/2FC-3
1-4-5
2FB/2FC-3
*Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021
1-4-6
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U000 Printing out an own-status report
Description
Prints out a list of the current settings of all maintenance items, and occurrences of paper jams and service
calls.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or the occurrences of paper jams and service calls.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, print out a list of the current settings of the maintenance items
so that you can reenter the same settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be output. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display List to be printed out
MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of all maintenance items
JAM List of paper jams
SERVICE CALL List of service calls
3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/11" x 8 1/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed loca-
tion.
When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Setting the factory default data
Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed).
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press MODE1(ALL) on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport.
Completion
Turn the main power switch off.
1-4-7
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U003 Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set (during initial set-up of the machine) the telephone number for contacting service.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.
Setting
1. Use the numeric keys to enter the telephone number (up to 15 digits).
* To enter symbols such as hyphens and parentheses, select as required from the symbols displayed on
the touch panel as shown below. To move the cursor, press Left or Right in the bottom row.
∗ #
( )
- (Space)
Left Right
2. Press the start key. The telephone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U004 Displaying the machine number
Description
Displays the machine number.
Purpose
To check the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently machine number is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-8
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U005 Copying without paper
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Remarks
Execute this maintenance mode after pull out all four cassettes.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
PPC Only the copier operates.
PPC + DP Both the copier and DP operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can
be made.
Paper feed locations
Magnifications
Simplex or duplex copy mode
Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999.
Copy density
Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the
screen for selecting an item is displayed.
6. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U018 Displaying the ROM checksum
Description
Displays the checksum of ROM.
Purpose
To check the checksum.
Method
Press the start key. The ROM checksum is displayed.
Display Description
MAIN Main PWB ROM checksum
ENGINE Engine PWB ROM checksum
SCANNER Scanner PWB ROM checksum
LANGUAGE(Stand.) Standard language ROM checksum
LANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM checksum
DP DP main PWB ROM checksum
FINISHER Document finisher* ROM checksum
*Optional.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-9
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U019 Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number for the ROM fitted to each PWB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide, based on the last digit of the number, if the newest version of ROM is
installed.
Method
1. Press the start key. The ROM version (the last 6 digits of the part number) is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the * or # keys.
Display Description
MAIN Main PWB ROM IC
ENGINE Engine PWB ROM IC
SCANNER Scanner PWB ROM IC
LANGUAGE (Stand.) Standard language ROM IC
LANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM IC
MAIN BOOT Main PWB booting
PRINTER Optional printer board booting
NETWORK SCANNER Optional network scanner ROM IC
DP DP ROM IC
FINISHER Optional document finisher main PWB ROM IC
ENGINE BOOT Engine PWB booting
FINISHER BOOT Optional document finisher main PWB booting
CASSETTE1 Deck PWB ROM IC
CASSETTE2 Cassette PWB ROM IC
DUPLEX Duplex PWB ROM IC
SIDE FEEDER Optional side feeder main PWB ROM IC
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U020 Initializing all data
Description
Initializes the backup memory on the scanner PWB, DP main PWB and engine PWB in order to return to the
factory default settings.
Refer to *1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized.
Purpose
To be executed as required.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing the maintenance item is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup memory is initialized and the default setting for the inch spec-
ifications is registered. When initializing is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same sta-
tus as when the main power switch is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-10
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U021 Memory initializing
Description
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of copier, namely each counter, service call history
and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item
U252 “Setting the destination.”
Refer to *2 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized.
Purpose
To return the machine settings to their factory default.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing the maintenance item is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data except that pertinent to the type of copier is initialized and the default setting
for each destination is registered.
When initializing is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
power switch is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U022 Initializing backup memory
Description
Initializes only the backup data for image processing.
Purpose
To be executed as required.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to initialize.
Display Description
SCANNER+DP Initialize the backup data of scanner PWB and DP main PWB.
ENGINE Initialize the backup data of engine PWB.
DP Initialize the backup data of DP main PWB.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. Backup data is initialized.
When initializing is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
power switch is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U024 HDD formatting
Description
Formats the HDD backup data areas for the document management, network scanner and department
administration.
Purpose
To initialize the HDD when installing or replacing the HDD after shipping.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing the maintenance item is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk.
The EXECUTE display flashes during initializing.
Initialization results is displayed when initializing is completed.
When initializing is complete, the machine automatically returns to the power-up state.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-11
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance Description
item No.
U026 Evacuation of backup data
Description
Transfers the backup data of the main PWB to the EEPROM.
Purpose
Used when replacing the main PWB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key to transfer the backup data.
The screen displays the result.
EXECUTE
CHECK SUM ****
CODE XXXX
Where XXX is the code indicating the contents.
See the table below.
Code Meaning
0000 Processing ends correctly.
0101 Verification abnormality occurs.
0102 Verification abnormality occurs at the time of check sum entry.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without transferring the data, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U027 Return of backup data
Description
Transfers the backup data of the EEPROM which was transferred with the U026 to flash memory.
Purpose
To use after the main PWB replaced.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. 3. Press the start key to transfer the backup data.
The screen displays the result.
EXECUTE
CHECK SUM ****
CODE XXXX
Where XXX is the code indicating the contents.
See the table below.
Code Meaning
0000 Processing ends correctly.
0203 Check sum does not agree when reading out from the EEPROM.
4. Disconnect and connect the power plug.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without transferring the data, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-11-1
1-4-12
2FB/2FC-2.0
1-4-13
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U030 Checking the operation of the motors
Description
Drives each motor.
Description
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the motor to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Two or more motors can be selected.
Display Motor
MAIN_TFR_EJE The drive motor (DM), transfer motor (TRM) and fuser motor (FM) are
turned ON.
REG MOT The registration motor (RM) is turned ON.
FEED MOT H The feed motor (FDM) is turned ON high speed.
BP CV MOT H The MP feed motor (MPFDM) is turned forwarding ON high speed.
BP FD MOT H The MP feed motor (MPFDM) is turned reversing ON high speed.
PF MOT3 H Paper feed motor 3 (PFM3) is turned ON high speed.
PF MOT4 H Paper feed motor 4 (PFM4) is turned ON high speed.
VF MOT H The vertical feed motor (VFDM) is turned ON high speed.
PF MOT1 Paper feed motor 1 (PFM1) is turned forwarding ON.
PF MOT2 Paper feed motor 2 (PFM2) is turned ON.
DECK FD MOT Paper feed motor 1 (PFM1) is turned reversing ON.
DUP SB MOT The duplex switchback motor (DUPSBM) is turned ON.
DUP SD REG The duplex side registration motor (DUPSRM) is turned ON.
DUP FD MT L The duplex feed motor (DUPFDM) is turned ON low speed.
FEED MOT L The feed motor (FDM) is turned ON low speed.
BP CV MOT L The MP feed motor (MPFDM) is turned ON low speed.
PF MOT3 L Paper feed motor 3 (PFM3) is turned ON low speed.
PF MOT4 L Paper feed motor 4 (PFM4) is turned ON low speed.
VF MOT L The vertical feed motor (VFDM) is turned ON low speed.
MAIN MOT The drive motor (DM) is turned ON.
TFR MOT The transfer motor (TRM) is turned ON.
EJECT MOT The transfer motor (FM) is turned ON.
DUP FD MT H The duplex feed motor (DUPFDM) is turned ON high speed.
DLP MOT The developing motor (DEVM) is turned ON.
1-4-12
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Displays the ON/OFF status of each paper detection switch on the paper conveying path.
Purpose
To check the operation of the switches for paper conveying.
Method
1. Press the start key. A list of switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Sensor
REG SW Registration switch (RSW)
FEED-A SW Feed switch 1 (FSW1)
FEED-B SW E Feed switch 2 (FSW2)
FD EJ SW Switchback exit switch (SBESW)
EJECT SW Exit switch (ESW)
FEED-B SW D Feed switch 2 (FSW2)
LCF SW A Deck conveying switch 1 (DKCSW1)
LCF SW B Deck conveying switch 2 (DKCSW2)
FEED-C SW Feed switch 3 (FSW3)
FEED-D SW Feed switch 4 (FSW4)
FEED-E SW Feed switch 5 (FSW5)
LDECK FD SW Side feeder feed switch (SFFSW)*
FS SW Feedshift switch (FSSW)
DUP JAM SW Duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW)
DUP FEED SW Duplex feed switch (DUPFSW)
DUP CV SW A Duplex conveying switch 1 (DUPCSW1)
DUP CV SW B Duplex conveying switch 2 (DUPCSW2)
DUP CV SW C Duplex conveying switch 3 (DUPCSW3)
PE SW1 Paper empty switch 1 (PESW1)
PE SW2 Paper empty switch 2 (PESW2)
PE SW3 Paper empty switch 3 (PESW3)
PE SW4 Paper empty switch 4 (PESW4)
LDECK PE SW Side feeder paper empty switch (SFPESW)*
LIM SW1 Lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1)
LIM SW2 Lift limit switch 2 (LILSW2)
LIM SW3 Lift limit switch 3 (LILSW3)
LIM SW4 Lift limit switch 4 (LILSW4)
LCF-A-1 SW Timing switch 1 (TIMSW1)
FEED-D-1 SW Timing switch 2 (TIMSW2)
FEED-E-1 SW Timing switch 3 (TIMSW3)
*Optional.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-13
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U033 Checking the operation of the solenoids
Description
Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the solenoid to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. The selected solenoid turns on for 1 s.
Display Solenoid
MP SOL MP solenoid (MPSOL)
FS SOL Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
WEB SOL Fuser web solenoid (FWSOL)
DUP FS SOL Duplex feedshift solenoid (DUPFSSOL)
DUP SB SOL Duplex switchback solenoid (DUPSBSOL)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-25 and 27.
U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper
Description
Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper.
Purpose
To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing
area for folio paper.
Method
Press the start key. The setting screen is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Setting Setting range Default setting
LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 (mm) 330
WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 (mm) 210
1-4-14
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors
Description
Drives the fan motors.
Description
To check the operation of the fan motors.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to operate. The selected item is displayed in reverse and starts driving the fan motor.
Display Operation
FEED SHIFT FAN The feedshift fan motor (FSFM) is turned ON.
DLP FAN R The developing duct fan motor (DEVDFM) is turned ON.
DLP FAN F Developing fan motor 1 (DEVFM1) and 2 (DEVFM2) are turned ON.
COOLING FAN Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1), cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2), cooling fan
motor 3 (CFM3), cooling fan motor 4 (CFM4), PWB fan motor 1
(PWBFM1) and PWB fan motor 2 (PWBFM2) are turned ON.
DUP FAN The duplex fan motor (DUPFM) is turned ON.
IMAGE FAN The image formation fan motor (IFFM) is turned ON.
LSU FAN The LSU fan motor (LSUFM) is turned ON.
LAMP FAN The lamp fan motor (LFM) is turned ON.
3. To stop the motor, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the motor stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Adjustment
See page 1-6-29.
U052 Adjusting duplex
Description
Adjusts the side registration of the duplex section.
Purpose
To check the operation of the duplex side registration motor.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting Change in value per step
Adjustment of side registration -128 to 127 -2 0.7mm
Increasing the value makes wider, while decreasing the value makes narrower.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the interrupt key.
5. Press the start key to output the test pattern.
6. Open the front cover.
7. Pull the duplex unit out and check the position of duplex side registration guide.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
1-4-15
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed.
Modify settings by interlock setting only if faulty images occur.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting: interlock setting
1. Select Interlock setting at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the item to be adjusted. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
3. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting Default
range setting
MAIN MOTOR Drive motor, transfer motor, fuser motor, regis- -100 to 100 0/3/-4/1/1
tration motor and feed motor speed adjustment (80 cpm)
0/3/1/-1/-1
(60 cpm)
POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 0
If the value of MAIN MOTOR is changed, the value of the drive motor, transfer motor, fuser motor, regis-
tration motor and feed motor are change at the same time.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being executed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode.
Correct values for an A3/11" x 17" output are:
A = 400 ± 1.5 mm
B = 270 ± 1.5 mm
Adjustment
1. Output an A3/11" x 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.
2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:
Figure 1-4-1
A: Drive motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
1-4-16
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U053 Setting: separate setting
1. Select Separate setting at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the item to be adjusted. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
3. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting Default
range setting
MAIN MOTOR Drive motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 0
TC MOTOR Transfer motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 3
FIX MOTOR Fuser motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 -4
RESIST MOTOR Registration motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 1 (80 cpm)
-1 (60 cpm)
POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 0
FEED MOTOR Feed motor speed adjustment -100 to 100 1 (80 cpm)
-1 (60 cpm)
70 mm
64 mm
64 mm
64 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
1-4-17
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U059 Setting fan motor mode
Description
Specifies whether to rotate the fan motor in sleep mode.
Purpose
To rotate the fan motor for certain period of time to prevent rise in temperature inside the machine in sleep
mode. In default setting, the fan motor stops immediately when switched to sleep mode and too high temper-
ature is detected inside the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Developing fan motor 1/2, cooling fan motor 1/2/3/4, power source fan motor, image for-
mation fan motor and PWB fan motor is rotated at a half speed in sleep mode.
OFF The rotation of developing fan motor 1/2, cooling fan motor 1/2/3/4, power source fan
motor, image formation fan motor and PWB fan motor is stopped in sleep mode.
1-4-17-1
1-4-18
2FB/2FC-3
1-4-19
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
Description
Adjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.
Adjusts when replacing CIS of DP.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
CCD Image scanning density
CIS Image scanning density (scanning from DP)
Setting: image scanning density
1. Select CCD at the screen for selecting an item.
Description Setting range Default setting
Image scanning density 1 to 23 12
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: image scanning density (scanning from DP)
1. Select CCD at the screen for selecting an item.
Description Setting range Default setting
Image scanning density (scanning from DP) 1 to 23 11
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
When CIS is selected, copying only the back side from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
Caution
The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:
Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)
Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
U061 Checking the operation of the exposure lamps
Description
Lights the exposure lamps.
Purpose
To check whether the exposure lamps are turned ON.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD Exposure lamp
CIS CIS (DP exposure lamp)
3. Press the start key. The selected lamp lights.
4. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
Supplement
When CIS is selected, copying only the back side from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-18
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U063 Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position of the scanner.
Purpose
Used when the white line continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned.
This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be
changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method
1. Press the start key. The setting screen is displayed.
2. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting item Setting Default setting Change in value per step
range
Shading position -8 to 2 0 0.17 mm
Increasing the value moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine left.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U064 Adjusting the CCD level
Description
Adjusts the CCD level.
Purpose
To adjust when density difference due to CCD is generated between both sides of the center of the copy
image.
Setting
1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
CCD level 3 to 5 4
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U065 Adjusting the scanning magnification
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-51 and 52.
U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration
Adjustment
See page 1-6-54.
U067 Adjusting the optical axis (center line)
Adjustment
See page 1-6-53.
1-4-19
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the document processor. Performs the test copy at the five
scanning positions after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the document proces-
sor is used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description Setting range Default
setting
ADJUST DATA Starting position adjustment for -32 to 32 12
scanning originals
TEST POSITION Scanning position for the test copy originals 0 to 4 0
Setting
1. Select ADJUST DATA of the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left
when the setting value is decreased.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Select TEST POSITION of the screen for selecting an item.
5. Select the Scanning position using the cursor up/down keys.
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
7. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the document processor and press the interrupt key.
The screen for the test copy mode is displayed.
8. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
9. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 4 and check that no
black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-91.
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-93.
U072 Adjusting the DP original center line
Adjustment
See page 1-6-92.
1-4-20
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U073 Checking the scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under the arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check the scanner operation.
Implementation
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operation
SCANNER MOT Scanner operation
HOME POTION Home position operation
DP READING DP scanning position operation
DUST CHECK Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
Setting: Scanning size
1. Select SCANNER MOT in the screen for selecting an item.
2. Press the start key.
3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400%
SIZE Original size See below.
LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
5000 A4 5000 A5R
4300 B5 7800 Folio
5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17"
10000 A3 9000 11" x 15"
8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14"
7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11"
6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
5. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key with the scanning operation stopped.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-21
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity
Description
Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and
when scanning an original from the DP.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
DP input light luminosity -12 to 12 0
Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-22
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section.
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U070, U071 and U072 will also be updated.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section.
Remarks
Cut a trail edge of a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) as shown in a figure.
Figure 1-4-1-1
Method
1. Set a specified original (part number: 2A068021) in the DP.
2. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
3. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description
FRONT Automatic adjustment for first page
BACK Automatic adjustment for second page
4. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is dis-
played.
Display Description
CONVEY SPEED DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
LEAD EDGE ADJ DP leading edge registration
TRAIL EDGE ADJ DP trailing edge registration
DP CENTER DP original center line
DP A MARGIN DP scanning margin (A side)
DP B MARGIN DP scanning margin (B side)
DP C MARGIN DP scanning margin (C side)
DP D MARGIN DP scanning margin (D side)
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed
and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the pro-
cedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding main-
tenance items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is
displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-23
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U080 Adjusting exposure in eco-print mode
Description
Adjusts the image density in the eco-print mode.
Purpose
To increase or decrease the image density in the eco-print mode.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting Setting range Default setting
Exposure is toner economy mode -12 to 0 -5
Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
Sets the black line inspection at the time of reading the original from the DP.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select CCD at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting Setting range Default setting
Black line inspection 0 to 255 200
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting
1. Select BLACK LINE at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select CLEAR.
3. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-24
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U089 Outputting the MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created by the copier.
Purpose
To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern output (with-
out scanning).
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output.
Display PG pattern to be output Purpose
GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit
engine output characteristics.
VTC-PG
3. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL, 1dot-LINE and VTC-PG, change the preset values
using the cursor up/down keys and press the start key to register the setting.
Setting Setting range Default setting
Output density of MONO-LEVEL 0 or 70 0
1dot-LINE 0 to 21 0
VTC-PG 0 to 12 0
4. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
5. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-25
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
Purpose
To make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2AC68241) on the contact glass.
2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is dis-
played.
Display Setting
SCAN CENTER Scanner center line
SCAN TIMING Scanner leading registration
SUB SCAN Scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction
MAIN SCAN Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction
SCAN A MARGIN Scanner reading margin (A side)
SCAN B MARGIN Scanner reading margin (B side)
SCAN C MARGIN Scanner reading margin (C side)
SCAN D MARGIN Scanner reading margin (D side)
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed
and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the pro-
cedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding main-
tenance items.
Since the scanner magnification in the main direction is not automatically adjusted, use U065 for this
adjustment.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-26
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U093 Adjusting the exposure density gradient
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode, depending on respective image quality
modes.
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respec-
tive image quality modes. Also used to make copy images darker or lighter.
Implementation
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the image quality mode. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display Setting
MIXED Density in text and photo modes
TEXT Density in the text mode
PHOTO Density in the text and photo mode
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density Setting: 0
Setting: 3
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Density adjustment
Light Center Dark
Figure 1-4-1 Exposure density gradient
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
1-4-27
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U093 Setting: Gradient in photo mode
1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Setting Setting Default
range setting
PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0
dark
PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0
light
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
1-4-28
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U099 Adjusting original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor mal-
functions frequently due to incident light or the like.
Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select an item and press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data
B/W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value
Setting original size judgment time
Method to display the data for the sensor
1. Press the start key. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed.
Display Description
TAIL EDGE POSI Detected original trailing position
ORIGINAL AREA Original size detection
SIZE Detected original size
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting
1. Select an item to be set.
Display Setting Setting Default
range setting
ORIGINAL Original threshold value 0 to 255 72
LIGHT SOURCE Light source threshold value 0 to 255 72
WAIT TIME Original size judgment time* 0 to 255 150
A4R AREA Original size detection position display (mm) 220/240 240
*Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment
Method to set the original size judgment time
1. Adjust the preset value using the * or # keys.
A larger value increases the original size judgment time, and a smaller value decreases it.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
1-4-29
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U100 Adjusting the surface potential
Description
Performs the main charging output.
Purpose
To check the main charging. Do not change the preset value.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
DSP DATA Changing the grid control voltage
MC ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and off
LASER ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off
ADC SPV The sampling value for every 1 sec of an potential sensor output
value
MC ADJ GAIN Value of the potential compensation
START ADJ GAIN Turning the potential compensation of first copy start on and off
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting the value of the potential compensation
1. Select MC ADJ GAIN at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the setting using the * or # keys.
Setting Setting range Initial setting
Value of the potential compensation 0/15/20/25 20
Basically, the setting need not be changed. Increase the setting value when poor image quality is
caused by dirt in the main charger wire.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting the potential compensation of first copy start
1. Select START ADJ GAIN at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON) using the * or # keys.
Initial setting: 0 (OFF)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
When MC ON/OFF or LASER ON/OFF is selected, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copy-
ing mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main charger output stops.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-30
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U101 Setting the other high voltages
Description
Sets the developing bias control voltage, the transfer control voltage, and the reverse transfer bias control
voltage or checks the output of these voltages.
Purpose
To check or change the developing bias, the transfer voltage, and the reverse transfer bias voltage.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description Setting Default
range setting
DEV BIAS SET Developing bias control voltage 0 to 255 117
TC SET Transfer control voltage 0 to 255 185 (80 cpm)
135 (60 cpm)
TC REV SET Reverse transfer control voltage 0 to 255 215
VPP SET VPP setting value 60 to 196 145
PTC TEST PTC section operation check - -
Setting
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting using the * or # keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
PTC section operation check
1. Select PTC TEST at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Press the start key.
Drive motor, transfer motor and developing motor are turned on, and then cleaning lamp and PTC unit is
turned on.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
1-4-31
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger
Description
Executes a cleaning operation for the main charger and changes the intervals at which the main charger is
cleaned.
Purpose
To check the cleaning operation for the main charger. Also to change the intervals for the operation.
Making the intervals longer decreases the stand-by time when starting copying.
Potential compensation is automatically performed after a cleaning operation end.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
MC ADJUST DATA Main charger cleaning operation intervals
MC TEST RUN Main charger cleaning operation ON
ON/OFF Main charger cleaning operation start timing
1-4-32
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.
Method
Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed.
Clearing
1. Press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The drive time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
Setting
1. Enter a five-digit drive time using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The drive time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the drive time, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer count
Description
Displays the counts of the transfer counter for checking or clearing.
Purpose
To check the count after replacement of the transfer unit.
To clear the counter value when replacing the transfer belt.
Method
Press the start key. The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed.
Clearing
1. Press the reset key and press the start key. The count is cleared,
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
U129 Adjusting the transfer timing
Description
Adjusts the ON/OFF timing of transfer charging output for each paper type.
Purpose
Used when faulty drum separation on paper occurs.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Setting Setting range Default setting
TC ON Transfer charging output ON timing for -30 to 30 -1.5 (80 cpm)
plain paper -4.0 (60 cpm)
TC OFF Transfer charging output OFF timing for -40 to 100 0 (80 cpm)
plain paper 13.0 (60 cpm)
TC ON(VELLUM) Transfer charging output ON timing for -30 to 30 0 (80 cpm)
thin paper -2.5 (60 cpm)
TC OFF(VELLUM) Transfer charging output OFF timing for -40 to 100 0 (80 cpm)
thin paper 13.0 (60 cpm)
TC ON(THICK) Transfer charging output ON timing for -30 to 30 -10.0
thick paper
TC OFF(THICK) Transfer charging output OFF timing for -40 to 100 0 (80 cpm)
thick paper 13.0 (60 cpm)
1-4-33
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U129 When the setting value of TC ON is increased, transfer timing becomes late to improve the separability.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U130 Initial setting for the developer
Description
Replenishes toner to the developer unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key. Installation of the toner is started. (Approximately 5 minutes)
Display Description
DLP SENS Presence of toner inside developing unit (1: No/0: Yes)
TIME(SEC) Toner install time*
RESULT Result of the installation (0: During installation/1: Installation is successful/2:
Installation is failed)
When it becomes 3 minutes before an installation end, it will count up from 0 and will become an instal-
lation end by 180.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after initial setting is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select INPUT and press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U135 Checking toner motor operation
Description
Drives toner motor.
Description
To check the operation of toner motor.
Remarks
When driving the toner motor long time or several times, developing section becomes the toner full and is
locked.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press TONER MOT on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
3. To stop the operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-34
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U137 Checking the toner level detection sensor
Description
Displays the detection status of the toner level detection sensor and toner container.
Purpose
To check the toner level in the developing unit and toner container.
Method
1. Press the start key.
A list of switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a sensor is detected, that sensor is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
DLP SENS Developing sensor (DEVS)
CONT SENS Toner container sensor (TCS)
CONT SET SW Toner container detection switch (TCDSW)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U147 Setting for toner applying operation
Description
Sets the mode for removing charged toner in the developer unit (T7 control: Toner applying operation).
Purpose
There is no necessity of changing the setting as for initial setting for factory default setting is automatic mode.
However, the original whose always print coverage ratio is low (reference: less than 2%) it outputs in large
quantities, setting in MODE5 fixed possibility.
If the charged toner stays inside the development unit, density decreases.
The number of MODE becomes large, so that the amount of removal toner increases.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
MODE Setting for toner applying operation mode
INTERVAL Displaying toner applying operation quantity
MODE6 DATA Displaying toner applying operation mode when setting MODE6
1-4-35
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U147 When selecting 6 (MODE6), the first 10k controls by MODE3, and MODE0 to MODE5 is automatically
set up according to the average of print coverage ratio of every 10k after it.
In accordance with the average print coverage ratio of 500, toner placing width of the execution time of
T7 control is decided.
Start
Outputting
Does
accumulation output
number of sheets No
from previous T7 control
exceed 500?
Yes
Once interrupted and toner appying operation by 500 sheets. Once interrupted and
toner appying operation by 500 sheets.
Supplement
Firmware MAIN: After 2910DP-XXX.XX and ENGINE: After 2911EQ-XXX.XXXX setting possibility.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-35-1
1-4-36
2FB/2FC-3
1-4-37
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U152 Setting developing motor mode
Description
Sets the developing motor low speed driving.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON With a developing motor low speed drive setting
OFF With no developing motor low speed drive setting
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U157 Checking the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting the
toner control.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit.
Method
Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U158 Checking the developing count
Description
Displays the developing count for checking.
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit.
Method
Press the start key. The developing count is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-36
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
Description
Changes the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fuser problem on thick paper.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
PAGE1 Control temperature during copying, primary stabilization fuser temperature, sec-
ondary stabilization fuser temperature, aging time after secondary stabilization,
control temperature adjustment in duplex copying and time from power on to stabi-
lization of fusing.
PAGE2 Control temperature adjustment in duplex copying using A4/Letter/B5 size paper
and control temperature adjustment when the fuser heater temperature goes low.
2. Select the item to be set and press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed.
Setting: PAGE1
1. Select the item to be set. The selecting item is displayed in reverse.
Display Setting Setting range Default setting
CONT TEMP Control temperature during copying 100 to 230 200 (80 cpm)
(°C) 195 (60 cpm)
1ST TEMP Primary stabilization fuser temperature 100 to 200 175 (120 V)
(°C) 140 (220-240 V)
2ND TEMP Secondary stabilization fuser temperature 100 to 230 185
(°C)
TIME Aging time after secondary stabilization 0 to 255 (s) 60
DUPLEX Control temperature adjustment in duplex -30 to 0 (°C) -10
copying
WARM UP TIME Time from power on to stabilization of 0 to 255 (s) 26
fusing
1-4-37
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U161 Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, the copy of whole surface black can be outputted in the inter-
rupt copying mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U162 Stabilizing fuser forcibly
Description
Stops the stabilization fuser drive forcibly, regardless of fuser temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fuser section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key.
The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless of fuser tempera-
ture. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fuser stabilization, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U163 Resetting the fuser problem data
Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key. The detection of a service call code is cleared.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U167 Checking/clearing the fuser count
Description
Displays and clears the fuser count for checking.
Purpose
To check or clear the fuser count after replacement of the fuser unit.
Method
Press the start key. The fuser count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Setting
1. Enter a seven-digit value using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U180 Checking the cleaning count
Description
Displays the cleaning count for checking.
Purpose
To check the cleaning count after replacement of the cleaning unit.
Method
Press the start key. The cleaning count is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-38
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U194 Setting the fuser web drive
Description
Sets the interval (number of copies) for turning on the fuser web solenoid.
Purpose
To be executed when the fuser web roller becomes extremely soiled.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting Setting range Default setting
Interval for turning on the fuser web solenoid 0 to 255 30 (sheets)
When setting to the value above default setting, replacement is needed before 500000.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U196 Turning the fuser heater on
Description
Turns the fuser heater M, S or L on.
Purpose
To check fuser heater turning on.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the heater to be turned on. The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off.
Display Description
FIX HEAT M Fuser heater M (FH-M)
FIX HEAT S Fuser heater S (FH-S)
FIX HEAT L Fuser heater L (FH-L)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when fuser heater M, S and L are off.
The screen for selecting the maintenance item No. is displayed.
U198 Setting the fuser phase control
Description
Sets the use of fuser phase control.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary.
If voltage descent accompanying fuser heater lighting occurs, select fuser phase control.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Fuser phase control present
OFF Fuser phase control absent
1-4-39
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U199 Displaying fuser heater temperature
Description
Displays the detected fuser temperature, temperature and humidity outside the machine, and temperature
and humidity inside the machine.
Purpose
To check the fuser temperature, temperature and humidity outside the machine, and temperature and humid-
ity inside the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Display Description
FIX TEMP Fuser temperature (°C)
FIX TEMP2 Fuser temperature (°C)
SURROUND TEMP Temperature outside the machine (°C)
HUMIDITY Absolute humidity outside the machine (g)
DEV TEMP Temperature inside the machine (°C)
DEV HUMIDITY Absolute humidity inside the machine (g)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No. is displayed.
U200 Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s.
The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U201 Initializing the touch panel
Description
Automatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel.
Purpose
To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed, and the + key displayed at the upper left of
the touch panel flashes.
2. Press on the center of the + key. The + key on lower right flashes.
3. Press the center of the flashing +.
Initialization of the touch panel is complete, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without initializing, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance mode No. is displayed.
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.
1-4-40
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U203 Operating DP separately
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Operation Setting range
TEST1(NON P) Without paper -
TEST2 With paper 100 to 200 (%)
When TEST2 is selected, a setting value (magnification) can be changed using the * or # keys.
Reading speed becomes slow if a setting value is increased.
4. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed
Setting
1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down keys. The selected counter is dis-
played in reverse.
Display Description
KEY-CARD The key card is installed.
KEY-COUNTER The key counter is installed.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the details for coin vender operation, such
as mode and unit price.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.
1-4-41
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. COUNT1 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bot-
tom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1.
When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line
on the immediate right, the top LED in that line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.
5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U208 Setting the paper size for the feeders
Description
Sets the sizes of paper placed in cassette1, cassette 2 and optional side feeder respectively.
Purpose
To set the size when the size of paper placed in cassette 1, cassette 2 or optional side feeder is changed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select paper size (11 x 8.5, A4, or B5) as each cassette 1-2 and optional side feeder. The selected item
is displayed in reverse.
Initial setting: A4 (220-240 V specifications)/11 x 8.5 (120 V specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U212 Setting the feeder lift operation
Description
Sets the operation of the side feeder lift motor for when paper in the optional side feeder is exhausted.
Purpose
To be set according to the paper loading method.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the method to load paper.
Display Description
SIDE FEED Load paper through the right cover
UPPER FEED Load paper through the upper cover
1-4-42
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U234 Setting punch destination
Description
Sets the destination of optional punch unit of document finisher.
Purpose
To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the destination.
Display Description
NOTHING With no punch unit
JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specifications
INCH Inch (North America) specifications
EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications
SWEDEN METRIC Metric (North Europe) specifications
Initial setting: HP ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-43
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U237 Adjusting finisher stack quantity
Description
Sets the number of sheets of stack on the main tray in the optional document finisher.
Purpose
To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting Description
0 Stack quantity: 3000 sheets
1 Stack quantity: 1500 sheets
Initial setting: 0
If the preset value is changed to 1, the number of sheets of a stack is limited to 1,500 in modes other
than the staple mode.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-44
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher
Description
Turns each motor and solenoid of the document finisher ON.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the document finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be checked.
Display Description
FINISHER Motors and solenoids of document finisher
SADDLE Motors and solenoids of centerfold unit
Method: Checking the motor and solenoid of the document finisher
1. Select FINISHER at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Motors and solenoids
FD_IN_MT_H Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on high speed
FD_IN_MT_M Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on middle speed
FD_IN_MT_L Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on low speed
CNV_MT_H Paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on high speed
CNV_MT_M Paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on middle speed
CNV_MT_L Paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on low speed
UP_MT Upper paper conveying belt motor (PCBM-U) is turned on
DOWN_MT Lower paper conveying belt motor (PCBM-L) is turned on
LGR_TEST Front/rear upper side registration guide motor (SRGM-FU/RU) test
operation for 11” x 17” size
A3_TEST Front/rear upper side registration guide motor (SRGM-FU/RU) test
operation for A3 size
WDTH_MT_L Lower side registration guide motor (SRGM-L) is turned on
SLAP_MT_INI Movable guide motor (MGM) is turned on initial driving
SLAP_MT_MOV Movable guide motor (MGM) is turned on
DRM_MT_H Siding drum motor (SDM) is turned high speed
DRM_MT_M Siding drum motor (SDM) is turned middle speed
DRM_MT_L Siding drum motor (SDM) is turned low speed
EJECT_MT_H Eject motor (EJM) is turned on high speed
EJECT_MT_M Eject motor (EJM) is turned on middle speed
EJECT_MT_L Eject motor (EJM) is turned on low speed
MTRAY_MT Main tray elevation motor (MTEM) is turned on
JTRAY_MT Multi job tray elevation motor (MJTEM) is turned on
SOL_A Feedshift solenoid A (FSSOLA) is turned on
SOL_B Feedshift solenoid B (FSSOLB) is turned on
SOL_C Feedshift solenoid C (FSSOLC) is turned on
COLO_SOL Paper forwarding pulley solenoid (PFPSOL) is turned on
LOCK_SOL Lock solenoid (LSOL) is turned on
P_PUT_SOL Paper holder solenoid (PHSOL) is turned on
EJECT_SOL Eject guide solenoid (EGSOL) is turned on
PUNCH_MT Punch motor (PUNM) is turned on
PUNCH_SOL Punch solenoid (PUNSOL) is turned on
1-4-45
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U240 3. To turn ON a solenoid with the motor driving, press the interrupt key before selecting the solenoid.
The driving motor will start operation, and the selected clutch or the solenoid will remain ON until the
interrupt key is pressed again.
4. To stop motor driving, press the interrupt key again.
5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key with the motor stopped.
Method: Checking the motor and solenoid of the centerfold unit
1. Select SADDLE at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Motors and solenoids
SDL_MT_H Main motor (MM) is turned ON high speed
SDL_MT_L Main motor (MM) is turned ON low speed
SDL_BLD_MT Centerfold blade motor (CBLM) is turned ON
SDL_CTR_MT Centering plate motor (CPM) is turned ON
SDL_WDTH_MT Side registration guide motor (SRGM) is turned ON
SDL_SOL Pressure release solenoid (PRSOL) is turned ON
3. To turn ON a solenoid with the motor driving, press the interrupt key before selecting the solenoid.
The driving motor will start operation, and the selected clutch or the solenoid will remain ON until the
interrupt key is pressed again.
4. To stop motor driving, press the interrupt key again.
5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key with the motor stopped.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key with the operation stopped. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
Description
Displays the status of each switch of the document finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of each switch of the document finisher.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Turn each switch ON manually.
When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted.
3. Change the screen using the * or # keys.
Display Switches
FD_IN_SW Paper entry sensor (PES)
EJT_SW Paper ejection sensor (PEJS)
DRM_SW Sub tray paper ejection sensor (STPES)
M_TRAY_FD_SW Intermediate tray paper conveying sensor (ITPCS)
P_DET_U_SW Upper paper conveying belt home position sensor (PCBHPS-U)
P_DET_D_SW Lower paper conveying belt home position sensor (PCBHPS-L)
PCH_BOX_SW Punch waste box sensor (PWBS)
SLAP_HP_SW Movable guide home position sensor (MGHPS)
P_PUT_SW Paper holder detection sensor (PHDS)
STP_FPIN_SW Front stapler empty sensor (STES-F)
STP_RPIN_SW Rear stapler empty sensor (STES-R)
STP_F_CT_SW Front stapler cartridge sensor (STCS-F)
STP_R_CT_SW Rear stapler cartridge sensor (STCS-R)
STP_F_HP_SW Front stapler home position sensor (STHPS-F)
STP_R_HP_SW Rear stapler home position sensor (STHPS-R)
CRT_F_HP_SW Front clincher home position sensor (CLNHPS-F)
1-4-46
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U241
Display Switches
CRT_R_HP_SW Rear clincher home position sensor (CLNHPS-R)
T_OPEN_SW Upper cover switch (UCSW)
F_OPEN_SW Front cover switch (FCSW)
JTRAY_DT_SW Multi job tray position sensor (MJTPS)
JTRAY_P_SW1 Paper detection switch 1 (PDSW1)
JTRAY_P_SW2 Paper detection switch 2 (PDSW2)
JTRAY_P_SW3 Paper detection switch 3 (PDSW3)
JTRAY_P_SW4 Paper detection switch 4 (PDSW4)
JTRAY_P_SW5 Paper detection switch 5 (PDSW5)
JTRAY_ULT_SW Multi job tray upper limit detection sensor (MJTULDS)
JTRAY_P_SW Multi job tray front/rear switches (MJTSW-F/MJTSW-R)
JTRAY_U_SW Multi job tray paper upper surface detection light emitting/intercept-
ing sensors (MJTPUSDLES/MJTPUSDLIS)
MTRAY_U_SW Main tray paper upper surface detection light emitting/intercepting
sensors (MTPUSDLES/MTPUSDLIS)
MTRAY_LM_SW Main tray upper limit detection sensor (MTULDS)
1000_SW Main tray load 1000 detection sensor (MTLDS-10)
1500_SW Main tray load 1500 detection sensor (MTLDS-15)
JTRAY_LLT_SW Multi job tray lower limit detection sensor (MJTLLDS)
3000_SW Main tray load 3000 detection sensors (MTLDS-30)
MTRAY_LLT_SW Main tray lower limit detection sensor (MTLLDS)
N_STP_HP_SW -
N_STP_CT_SW -
W_UF_HP_SW Front upper side registration guide home position sensor
(SRGHPS-FU)
W_UR_HP_SW Rear upper side registration guide home position sensor
(SRGHPS-RU)
W_L_HP_SW Lower side registration guide home position sensor (SRGHPS-L)
UP_HP_SW Upper paper sensor (PS-U)
DWN_HP_SW Lower paper sensor (PS-L)
SDL_SET_SW Centerfold unit set switch (CUSSW)
SDL_DET_SW Eject tray detection switch (ETDSW)
SDL_W_HP_SW Side registration guide home position sensor (SRGHPS)
SDL_S_HP_SW Centering plate home position sensor (CPHPS)
SDL_B_HP_SW Centerfold blade home position sensor (CBLHPS)
SDL_FD_SW Centerfold unit paper entry sensor (CUPES)
SDL_P_SW Eject tray paper detection switch (ETPDSW)
SDL_E_SW Folded edge detection sensor (FEDS)
SDL_T_SW Inside tray detection sensor (ITDS)
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-47
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turns the motors in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Operation
DP FEED MOT Original feed motor (OFM) is turned ON forwarding.
DP REG MOT Original registration motor (ORM) is turned ON.
DP CONV MOT Original conveying motor (OCM) is turned ON.
DP LIFT MOT DP lift motor (DPLIM) is turned ON.
CIS FAN MOT DP fan motor (DPFM) is turned ON.
DP FEED MOT REV Original feed motor (OFM) is turned ON reversing.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-48
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U245 Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
To check the messages to be displayed.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be displayed.
3. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each message one at a time.
When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the mes-
sage corresponding the specified number is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U247 Setting the paper feed device
Description
Drives each motor of the optional side feeder.
Purpose
To check the operation of the optional side feeder.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the motor to be operated.
When checking the side feeder lift motor (SFLM) operation, set the paper to the side feeder.
The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Operation
SDECK MOT Side feeder drive motor (SFDM)
SDECK FAN Separation fan motor (SPFM) and suction fan motor (IFM)
SDECK LIFT Side feeder lift motor (SFLM)
SDECK CVCL Side feeder conveying clutch (SFCCL)
SDECK FDCL Side feeder paper feed clutch (SFPFCL)
1-4-49
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U248 Setting the paper ejection device
Description
Adjusts the paper stop timing in the punch mode, the booklet stapling position, and the center folding position
for the copier with an document finisher installed. Also, displays and clears the punch-hole scrap count.
Purpose
Adjustment or registration stop timing in punch mode
Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode.
Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode
To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
Punch-hole scrap count display (clearing)
Used to manually clear the punch-hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch-hole scrap is
shown on the touch panel after collection.
Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Setting the punch limit
Sets the maximum number of punches possible in order to be informed of the timing for disposing of waste
punch. Decrease the value when using thick paper frequently.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
PUNCH REGIST ADJUST Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
PUNCH POSITION ADJUST Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode
PUNCH COUNT Punch-hole scrap count display
SADDLE STAPLE ADJUST Booklet stapling position adjustment
SADDLE ADJUST Adjustment of center folding position
PUNCH PRESET Punch limit
Setting the registration stop timing in punch mode
1. Select PUNCH REGIST ADJUST at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode -5 to 5 0
Sample 1 Sample 2
If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the preset value. If the copy paper is Z-folded
(sample 2), decrease the preset value.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
1-4-50
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U248 Setting the paper stop timing
1. Select PUNCH POSITION ADJUST at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting Default Change in value
range setting per step
Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode -10 to 10 0 0.24 mm
A
Preset value A: 5.5 +- 2mm (inch)
9.5 +- 2mm (metric)
If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A, increase the preset
value. If the distance is larger than the value A, decrease the preset value.
Changing the value by 1 changes by 1.0 mm.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Displaying the punch-hole scrap count
1. Select PUNCH COUNT at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Press the reset key to clear the count.
Description Setting range Default setting
Punch-hole scrap count 0 to 9999999 -
(current number of punching times)
If the staple position is displaced toward the ejection side (copy sample 1), decrease the preset value. If
the staple position is displaced toward the feeding side (copy sample 2), increase the preset value.
1-4-51
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U248
Proper
Increase the
preset value.
Upper side is longer. Lower side is longer.
Decrease the
preset value.
1-4-52
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U248 Setting the punch limit
1. Select PUNCH PRESET at the screen for selecting an item.
2. Change the value using the * or # keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
Punch limit (max. number of punches) 0 to 999000 100000
The punch limit can be set to any value in increments of 1000.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle
Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set maintenance cycle is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting value (0 to 9999999) using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared.
2. Press the reset key.
3. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
Setting
1. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-53
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U252 Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020, in order to return the set-
ting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the destination. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specifications
INCH Inch (North America) specifications
EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications
ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
1-4-54
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11 x 17 or B4/Legal paper is to be counted as
one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select double or single count. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper
DOUBLE COUNT(A3/11 x 17) Double count for A3/11" x 17" paper only
DOUBLE COUNT(B4) Double count for B4/legal size or larger
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-55
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance Description
item No.
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that can
be made after the detection.
Purpose
To change the copying operation after detection of toner empty status.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select single or continuous copying. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE MODE Enables only single copying.
CONTINUE MODE Enables single and continuous copying.
1-4-56
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DP
Description
Sets whether the copies will be ejected in the same or opposite order as the originals when copying from the
DP.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the ejection order. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FACE-DOWN (NORMAL) Face down ejection
FACE-UP (SPEED) Face up ejection with bitmap copy
FACE-UP (MEMORY) Face up ejection with memory copy
1-4-57
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U266 Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents
Description
Sets the number of days to save documents on the HDD before automatically deleting.
Purpose
To change the number of days to retain data that is saved within the auto-delete area of the HDD before auto-
matically deleting.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
Number of days after which to automatically delete documents 0 to 7 0
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U277 Setting auto application change time
Description
Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operation
when the machine is used as a printer (only if the printer kit is installed).
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
Switching time 30 to 270 (s) 30 (s)
1-4-58
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish
on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Displays the cleaning guidance
OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance
COUNT Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication
Initial setting: ON
Setting count value is displayed only if the setting is ON.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting the count value
1. Enter a three-digit value using the # or * key, or numeric keys. and then press the start key. The value is
set.
The setting value x 1000-sheet is possible for a display setting count value.
When reading a display setting count value is done, black line cleaning indication is displayed in auto-
matically. If the black line is detected, black line cleaning guidance is displayed in automatically when
reading the a display setting count value is done from that point.
When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected.
2. To clear the count, press the reset key and then press the start key. The count is cleared and the screen
for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U327 Setting the drawer heater ON/OFF
Description
Sets ON/OFF of the drawer heater and optional side feeder dehumidifier.
Purpose
To change the setting when dew condensation on the drum is heavy.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
CASSETTE ON Drawer heater ON
CASSETTE OFF Drawer heater OFF
SIDE FEEDER ON Side feeder dehumidifier heater ON
SIDE FEEDER OFF Side feeder dehumidifier heater OFF
Initial setting: Drawer heater OFF, side feeder dehumidifier OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting for U327 and U339
U327 U339 Description
ON ON Drawer heater/dehumidifier heater ON for the sleep mode.
OFF OFF Drawer heater/dehumidifier heater OFF for the sleep mode.
OFF ON/OFF Drawer heater/dehumidifier heater OFF for the sleep mode.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-59
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation
Description
Sets the number of copies at which copy ejection will be switched from the optional document finisher's sub
tray to its main tray when sorting is turned ON in the setting for the output mode under user simulation.
Purpose
To be set as required according to the number of copies the user makes.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Initial setting: 201 (sheets)
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U331 Switching the paper ejection mode
Description
Sets whether to eject copied sheets with the printed face facing up or down.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the ejection mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FACE UP Face-up ejection
FACE DOWN Face-down ejection
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is
displayed.
1-4-60
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U335 Setting the drum heater mode
Description
Sets the drum heater to ON or OFF. If the image deletion occurs in an environment of a temperature and
humidity widely varies, change the setting to ON2.
Purpose
Basically, the setting need not be changed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting the drum heater
1. Select ON1, ON2 or OFF.
Display Description
ON1 Controls the drum heater to be turned ON/OFF by temperature and humidity.
ON2 Always ON
OFF Always OFF
1-4-61
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray
is selected as the eject location.
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets
OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Initial setting: ON
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Setting
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Duplex copy
OFF Simplex copy
1-4-62
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the
number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification.
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-28.
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-55.
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Adjustment
See page 1-6-95.
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-18.
U467 Adjusting the laser output
Description
Adjusts the laser output power.
Purpose
The setting need not be changed.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting range: 0 to 255
Initial setting: 200 (80 cpm), 150 (60 cpm)
A larger preset value causes dots and lines to be clearly large and thick and the reference density to be
darker.
A smaller preset value causes dots and lines to be clearly small and thin and the reference density to be
lighter.
Although three lasers (ADJUST DATA1, ADJUST DATA2 and ADJUST DATA3) can be adjusted sepa-
rately, be sure to set the same value. If different values are set, proper images cannot be obtained.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-63
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U472 Adjusting the laser output position
Description
Adjust the writing position of a laser output.
Purpose
Enter the numerical value indicated by the LSU cover in order to arrange the writing position of three laser
when replacing the laser scanner unit.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be adjusted.
2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting range Default setting
DLY 1 Delay value of PWM1 output 0 to 15 0
DLY 2 Delay value of PWM2 output 0 to 15 0
DLY 3 Delay value of PWM3 output 0 to 15 0
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U504 Initializing the scanner NIC
Description
Initializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default.
Purpose
To return to a setup at the time of factory shipments.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U505 Setting data base assistant
Description
Sets whether or not the database linkage setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Database linkage setting is enabled.
OFF Database linkage setting is disabled.
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-64
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U506 Setting the time out
Description
Sets the communication timeout time for connection to a computer.
Purpose
To change the preset value if a communication error occurs after connection to a computer continues for a
long time. By delaying the error detection timing, the error may be cleared. If the error is not cleared after the
preset value is changed, however, return the preset value to the initial value.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Default setting
Timeout time 10 to 120 (s) 10
1-4-65
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U510 Setting the enterprise mode
Description
Sets whether or not the enterprise mode setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed.
This maintenance mode is effective for only 120 V specifications.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Supplement
It is not possible to turn setting simultaneously with U511 (Setting scan To FTP) to ON.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Enterprise mode setting is enabled.
OFF Enterprise mode setting is disabled.
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U511 Setting scan To FTP
Description
Sets whether or not scan to FTP setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed.
This maintenance mode is effective for only 120 V specifications.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Supplement
It is not possible to turn setting simultaneously with U510 (Setting the enterprise mode) to ON.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Scan to FTP setting is enabled.
OFF Scan to FTP setting is disabled.
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-66
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Display Paper feed locations
BYPASS MP tray
CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1
CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2
CASSETTE 3 Cassette 3
CASSETTE 4 Cassette 4
SIDE FEEDER Optional side feeder
DUPLEX Duplex unit
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all paper feed locations, press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the jam counts
TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts
1-4-67
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U904 Checking/clearing the call for service counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types.
Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts.
Start
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the call for service counts
TOTAL COUNT Displays the total call for service counts
1-4-68
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
Description
Displays or clears the counts of the DP or optional document finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of the DP and optional document finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consum-
able parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
DP
Display Description
ADP Number of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP Number of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
Document finisher
Display Description
CP CNT Number of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated
PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated
STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated
SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all, press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U906 Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and the
related parts are serviced.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control.
The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine returns to the same status as when the main power
switch is turned on.
1-4-69
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U907 Checking/clearing the count value on each ejection location
Description
Displays and resets the count value of ejected sheets on each ejection location.
Purpose
Checks the replacement period for maintenance parts. Also resets the count value after replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
The count value on each ejection location is displayed.
Display Description
STRAIGHT Straight ejection count
SWITCH BACK Reversed ejection count
AUTO DUPLEX Duplex ejection count
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all, press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
U908 Checking the total counter value
Description
Displays the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for total count value is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U909 Checking/clearing the fuser web count
Description
Displays and clears the count of the fuser web roller operation.
Purpose
To clear the fuser web counts after replacing the fuser web roller during maintenance or for other reasons.
Method
Press the start key.
Clearing
1. Press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a seven-digit value using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-70
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press CANCEL on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key.
The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is dis-
played.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the paper size. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear all counts, press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U920 Checking the copy counts
Description
Checks the copy counts.
Purpose
To check the copy counts.
Method
Press the start key. The current counts of copy counter and printer counter are displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box count
Description
Displays and clears the value of waste toner box count.
Purpose
To check the period of replacement of waste toner box. Also to clear the count value after replacement.
Method
Press the start key. The count value of a waste toner box is displayed.
Clearing
1. Press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.
1-4-71
2FB/2FC
Maintenance Description
item No.
U922 Checking/clearing the solenoid count value
Description
Displays and clears the count value of solenoid.
Purpose
To check the period of replacement of solenoid. Also to clear the count value after replacement.
Method
Press the start key.
Display Description
FS SOL COUNT Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
DUP SB SOL COUNT Duplex switchback solenoid (DUPSBSOL)
Clearing
1. Press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be changed.
2. Enter a seven-digit value using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.
U925 Checking/clearing the system error counts
Description
Displays and clears the count value of system error.
Purpose
To check the system error status by types.
Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
Press the start key. The count for system error detection by type is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the counts for all system error and press the reset key.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.
U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts
Description
Resets all of the counts back to zero.
Supplement
The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000
or less.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared.
CANNOT EXECUTE is displayed if the count cannot be cleared.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
U928 Checking machine life counts
Description
Displays the machine life counts.
Purpose
To check the machine life counts.
Method
Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-72
2FB/2FC-3
Maintenance Description
item No.
U935 Relay board maintenance
Description
Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service (C0060 and C0330) occurs. However, after the set-
ting, call for service (C0060 and C0330) occurs again when progress of period.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE 0 Setting mode: OFF
MODE 1 Setting mode: 60 cpm machine status
MODE 2 Setting mode: 80 cpm machine status
Initial setting: MODE 0
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Supplement
After removing the cause of the problem, be sure to change the setting in OFF.
U954 Setting the type of cooling fan
Description
Sets the new or old type of cooling fan.
Purpose
To change the setting according to the type of the cooling fan.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select MODE1 or MODE2. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE2 New type of cooling fan
MODE1 Old type of cooling fan
1-4-73
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance Description
item No.
U965 Setting the cassette disconnection
Description
Sets whether or not cancellation of cassette disconnection with the reset key is enabled after abnormal cas-
sette has been detected.
Purpose
Enables cancellation of cassette disconnection by user.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Enables cancellation of cassette disconnection with the reset key on.
OFF Normal cancellation of disconnection
1-4-74
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance Description
item No.
U989 HDD Scandisk
Description
Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
Purpose
If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the hard disk
drive may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing scandisk, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replace-
ment.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
CCD Accumulated time for the exposure lamp
CIS Accumulated time for CIS
The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared.
2. Press the reset key.
3. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item
No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be cleared.
2. Enter a seven-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U991 Checking the scanner operation count
Description
Displays the scanner operation count.
Purpose
To check the status of use of the scanner.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
COPY SCAN COUNT Counts of scanner operation
NT SCAN COUNT Counts of network scanner operation
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.
1-4-75
2FB/2FC-2.0
Start
Enter the
Output the report (page 1-4-83).
management code.
Press [Close].
1-4-76
2FB/2FC
1-4-77
2FB/2FC
Printing from unregistered sources (printer) (3) Default settings for copying
Authorizes or prohibits printing from computers with
Exposure mode
printer drivers that do not support job accounting.
Exposure mode changes the default for how the copier
This setting is displayed only if Printer Job Accounting
adjust how dark or light copying is made.
is [On].
1. Select [Exposure Mode] using the cursor up/down
1. Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.].
keys and press [Change #].
2. Select [Others Mgt. Reg. (print)] and press [Change
2. Select [Manual] or [Auto].
#].
3. Select [On] or [Off].
Exposure steps
4. Press [Close].
Changes the number of intermediate steps for manual
adjustment of exposure.
Copy/Printer output management
1. Select [Exposure Steps] using the cursor up/down
Select whether copying and printing are managed
keys and press [Change #].
together or separately.
2. Select [1 step] or [0.5 step].
1. Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.].
2. Select [Copy/Printer output mgt] and press
Original image quality
[Change #].
Sets the default original quality.
3. Select [All] or [Each].
1. Select [Original Image Quality] using the cursor up/
4. Press [Close].
down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select [Text+Photo], [Text], or [Photo].
Scanner job accounting
Activates or deactivates job accounting when the
EcoPrint
copier is used for scanning.
Selects whether to select EcoPrint on or off.
This setting is displayed only if the copier is equipped
1. Select [EcoPrint] using the cursor up/down keys
with the optional scanner kit.
and press [Change #].
1. Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.].
2. Select [On] or [Off].
2. Select [Scanner Job Accounting] and press
[Change #].
Adjusting background intensity
3. Select [On] or [Off].
If the background on copies appears too dark, you can
4. Press [Close].
lighten it.
1. Select [Background exp. adj] using the cursor up/
Response to unauthorized requests
down keys and press [Change #].
Sets the actions when users attempt to copy in excess
2. Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the intensity.
of the specified copy limitation.
Setting range: -2 to +2
1. Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.].
2. Select [Excess of limit Setting] and press [Change
Adjusting thin lines
#].
Depending on the using environment, paper or original,
3. Select [Stop job immediately], [Stop after job done]
dragged stains may appear around horizontal thin lines
or [Only warning].
in some cases. To eliminate these stains, use the
4. Press [Close].
[Thinner] setting in this option.
1. Select [Thin Line adjustment] using the cursor up/
Default of copy limitation
down keys and press [Change #].
Sets the default of copy limitation when registering a
2. Press [Thinner] or [Thicker] to adjust the line thick-
new department.
ness (1 to 5).
1. Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.].
2. Select [Def. Val. of coun. Limit] and press [Change
Correcting fine black line
#].
Configures the copier to make them less noticeable if
3. Enter the number of pages from 1 to 999,999 using
the copied image has black streaks (dirty streaks not
the numeric keys.
present on the original).
4. Press [Close].
1. Select [Correct. fine black line] using the cursor up/
down keys and press [Change #].
Total count by size, 1-5
2. Select [On] or [Off].
Registers specific paper sizes and types of paper to
check the copy count.
Selecting paper
1. Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.].
Sets whether the copy paper is automatically selected
2. Select [Total size 1-5] and press [Change #].
according to the size of the original document or the
3. Press [On].
copy paper in the default cassette is forcibly selected.
4. Press [Select size].
1. Select [Select Paper] using the cursor up/down
5. Select a paper size and press [Close].
keys and press [Change #].
6. To specify a paper type, press [Select Paper Type].
2. Select [APS] or [Default drawer] ([Default cas-
7. Select the paper type and press [Close].
sette]).
8. Press [Close].
1-4-78
2FB/2FC
Selecting copy paper for zooming Adjusting automatic exposure for scanning text doc-
Automatically sets the copy paper according to the uments
selected zooming level or according to the size of the Adjusts the scanning exposure when the copier is
original document. installed with the option scanner.
1. Select [APS Setting] using the cursor up/down keys 1. Select [Adjust auto exposure (OCR)] using the cur-
and press [Change #]. sor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select [Most Suit Size] or [Same as Orig. Size]. 2. Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the exposure.
Setting range: -3 to +3
Selecting paper types for automatic paper selection
Sets the type of paper when the copier automatically Adjusting manual exposure: Text+Photo mode
selects the copy paper according to the size of the orig- Adjusts the median value for the manual exposure
inal. range.
1. Select [Select paper type (APS)] using the cursor 1. Select [Adj. Manual expo.(Mixed)] using the cursor
up/down keys and press [Change #]. up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press [On] and select the paper to type for auto- 2. Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the exposure.
matic paper selection. Setting range: -3 to +3
Plain/Transparency/Rough/Vellum/Labels/Recy-
cled/Preprinted/Bond/Cardstock/Color (Colour)/ Adjusting manual exposure: Text mode
Prepunched/Letterhead/Thick paper/Envelope/High Adjusts the median value for the manual exposure
Quality/Custom 1-8 range.
1. Select [Adj. Manual expo.(Text)] using the cursor
Selecting default cassette up/down keys and press [Change #].
Selects the cassette (1 to 5) to be used automatically. 2. Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the exposure.
The MP tray is not available for the default cassette. Setting range: -3 to +3
[5th paper] is available when the copier is equipped
with an optional side feeder. Adjusting manual exposure: Photo mode
1. Select [Default drawer (Default cassette)] using the Adjusts the median value for the manual exposure
cursor up/down keys and press [Change #]. range.
2. Select the cassette. 1. Select [Adj. Manual expo.(Photo)] using the cursor
up/down keys and press [Change #].
Specifying cassette for cover paper 2. Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the exposure.
Sets the cassette which is automatically selected to Setting range: -3 to +3
feed cover paper during the cover or booklet mode is
used. Selecting default zoom
[5th paper] is available when the copier is equipped Sets whether to use automatic zoom.
with an optional side feeder. 1. Select [Reduce/Enlarge] using the cursor up/down
1. Select [Drawer for cover paper] ([Cassette for cover keys and press [Change #].
paper]) using the cursor up/down keys and press 2. Select [Auto %] or [100%].
[Change #].
2. Select the cassette. Selecting sorting and offsetting output
Sets sorting and/or offsetting output as the default out-
Automatic zoom put.
When the sizes of the original document and the copy 1. Select [Sort/Offset (Sort/Group)] using the cursor
paper do not match, this determines whether the origi- up/down keys and press [Change #].
nal is automatically zoomed to fit onto the copy paper. 2. Select Sort and Offset [On] or [Off].
1. Select [Auto % Priority Setting] using the cursor up/
down keys and press [Change #]. Selecting auto rotation
2. Select [Off] or [On]. Sets whether the automatic rotation by default.
1. Select [Auto Rotation] using the cursor up/down
Adjusting auto exposure keys and press [Change #].
Adjusting the median exposure for auto exposure by 2. Select [No Rotate] or [Rotate].
biasing the reference exposure.
1. Select [Adjust auto exposure] using the cursor up/ Default margin
down keys and press [Change #]. Sets the default margins for copying.
2. Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the exposure. 1. Select [Default margin width] using the cursor up/
Setting range: -3 to +3 down keys and press [Change #].
2. Specify the default margin for each side using cur-
sor up/down or left/right keys.
Setting range
Inch specifications: 0 to 3/4" (in 1/8" increments)
Metric specifications: 0 to 18 mm (in 1-mm incre-
ments)
1-4-79
2FB/2FC-2.0
1-4-80
2FB/2FC
Specifying the paper weight to the paper type Orientation of original document
Assigns one of the paper weights to the paper type. Sets the orientation of the original document on the
1. Select [Paper Type (paper weight)] using the cursor contact glass.
up/down keys and press [Change #]. 1. Select [Orig. Set Direction] using the cursor up/
2. Select the paper type to specify the weight using down keys and press [Change #].
the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #]. 2. Select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]) or [Left Top Edge]
3. Select the paper weight. ([Left top corner]).
Extra Heavy/Heavy3/Heavy2/Heavy1/Normal3/
Normal2/Normal1/Light (Thin) Setting sleep timer timeout
Extra Heavy - OHP sheet/Heavy3 - from 171 g/m2 Predetermines the period of time before the copier
enters sleeping.
to 209 g/m2/Heavy2 - from 136 g/m2 to 170 g/m2/
If the copier is used frequently, we recommend using a
Heavy1 - from 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2/Normal3 - longer timeout. If it is used infrequently, use a shorter
from 91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2/Normal2 - from 76 g/m2 timeout.
to 90 g/m2/Normal1 - from 60 g/m2 to 75 g/m2/ 1. Select [Sleep mode changing time] using the cursor
Light (Thin) - from 60 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 up/down keys and press [Change #].
4. Press [Close]. 2. Set the time using [+] or [-] key.
Setting range: 1 to 240 minutes
Allowing duplex copying to custom paper type
Determines whether duplex copying is allowed to the Setting Low-Power timer timeout
custom paper type. Sets the period of time before the copier enters Low-
1. Select [Select paper type(2sided)] using the cursor Power mode.
up/down keys and press [Change #]. 1. Select [Low power mode chng. time] using the cur-
2. Select from [Custom 1] through [Custom 8] and sor up/down keys and press [Change #].
press [Change #]. 2. Set the time using [+] or [-] key.
3. Select [On] or [Off]. Setting range: 1 to 240 minutes
4. Press [Close].
Setting auto clear timeout time
Making copying on letterhead paper easy Sets the period after copying before the copier auto-
Copying the original onto letterhead paper requires that matically clears the previous settings.
the orientation of the original and the target paper 1. Select [Auto Clear Time Setting] using the cursor
match with each other. By switching [Adj(usting). Print up/down keys and press [Change #].
Direction] on, the copier correctly prints the original 2. Set the time using [+] or [-] key.
onto the letterhead paper when the original and the let- Setting range: 10 to 270 seconds
terhead paper are aligned with each other in the same
orientation on the contact glass and in the cassette. Selecting output destination
This function also applies to prepunched and pre- Sets the default destination for finished copies.
printed paper. This setting is available when the copier is equipped
1. Select [Special paper action mode] ([Specif. paper with the optional document finisher.
action mode]) using the cursor up/down keys and 1. Select [Select Copy output mode] using the cursor
press [Change #]. up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select [Adj. Print Direction] or [Speed Priority]. 2. Select the desired output destination.
Auto/Tray A /Tray B/Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/Tray 4/
Auto detect originals Tray 5
Predetermines what paper size is selected for printing
when copying an original document of non-standard Activating operation panel sound
sizes. Activates the sound for confirmation when the opera-
This setting is only available for metric specifications. tion panel keys are pressed.
1. Select [Org. Auto Detect Setting] using the cursor 1. Select [Key sound ON/OFF] using the cursor up/
up/down keys and press [Change #]. down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select the paper size using the cursor up/down 2. Select [Off] or [On].
keys and press [Change #].
When the size of the original document is cardstock Enabling silent mode
or A6R, select [Cardstock] or [A6]. The silent mode lets the copier deactivate the ventilat-
When the size of the original document is B4R or ing fans for quieter operation.
Folio, select [B4] or [Folio]. 1. Select [Silent Mode] using the cursor up/down keys
When the size of the original document is 11 x 15" and press [Change #].
(computer form), select [On] or [Off]. 2. Select [Off] or [On].
3. Press [Close].
1-4-81
2FB/2FC-2.0
1-4-82
2FB/2FC
Specifying the paper type to the MP tray The password should be a number up to 8 digits.
Sets the paper type when using the MP tray. If you prefer not to specify a password, press
1. Press [Select Paper Type]. [Clear]. Press [Enter].
2. Select the paper type. 7. Press [Close].
Plain/Transparency/Rough/Vellum/Labels/Recy- 8. To specify a name and a password to the other
cled/Preprinted/Bond/Cardstock/Color (Colour)/ boxes, repeat steps 2 and 7.
Prepunched/Letterhead/Thick paper/Envelope/High 9. Press [Cancel].
Quality/Custom 1-8
3. Press [Close]. Deleting all documents in box
Deletes all documents in the synergy print boxes at
once.
(7) Registering non-standard sizes for originals 1. Press [Box Editing].
2. Select the box containing the documents to be
Registers up to four non-standard sizes for the original
deleted.
documents of non-standard size.
To select the box, directly press the touch panel
1. Press [Register Orig. Size].
key, or enter the number using the numeric keys
2. Select the one of the four custom sizes available (1
followed by [Enter].
to 4) and press [Change #].
3. Press [Reset Box].
3. Press [On].
4. Press [Yes].
4. Specify the vertical size (Y) as the height using the
All documents in the box will be deleted.
[+] or [-] key.
5. Press [Close].
Setting range
6. Press [Cancel].
Inch specifications: 2" to 11 5/8"
Metric specifications: 50 to 297 mm
Specifying period to store documents
5. Specify the horizontal size (X) as the width using
By specifying period to store the documents in the syn-
the [+] or [-] key.
ergy print box, the documents can be automatically
Setting range
deleted after the period.
Inch specifications: 2" to 17"
1. Press [Document save term] ([Document saving]).
Metric specifications: 50 to 432 mm
2. Press [Set saving term] ([Set save period]).
Specify the period store the documents using [+] or
(8) Setting document management defaults
[-] key.
Print document list Setting range: 1 to 7 days.
Prints a list of documents in the form box, shared data To indefinitely store the documents, press [No time
box and synergy print box. limit].
Before printing lists, be sure that the cassette is loaded
with 11” x 8 1/2" (or A4) paper.
1. Press [Print the list] under the specific data box. (9) Hard disk management
2. The list for the data box is printed.
Checks the free space on the hard disk or delete the
unwanted data to free up the space.
Resetting document box
1. To check the free space on the hard disk and the
Deletes all documents in the form box, shared data box
total capacity, press [On] under [Check HDD capac-
or synergy print box.
ity] (on the left side of the touch panel).
1. Press [Reset Box] for the box to be initialized.
To delete the unwanted data, press [On] under
2. Press [Yes].
[Delete invalid data] (on the right side of the touch
All documents contained in the box are deleted.
panel).
Specifying name and password to document box
(10) Printing reports
Names the document boxes in the synergy print box
and specify a password. Once a password is specified, Prints the following reports using the operation panel.
printing or deleting a document in the synergy print box Copy status report
prompts you to enter the password. Machine status report
1. Press [Box Editing]. Toner coverage report
2. Select the box to specify a password. Before printing reports, be sure that the cassette is
To select the box, directly press the touch panel loaded with 11" x 8 1/2" (or A4) paper.
key, or enter the number on the numeric keys fol- The toner coverage report indicates the number of
lowed by [Enter]. copying volume that has been made. It also shows the
To name the box, select [Box name] and press black toner coverage in percentage for individual paper
[Change #]. sizes including the following.
3. Enter the box name and press [End]. Total toner coverage
4. Specify the password to the box. Toner coverage for copying
5. Select [Password] and press [Change #]. Toner coverage for printing
6. Enter the password using the numeric keys and 1. Press the appropriate key to print the report.
press [Close]. The report is printed.
1-4-83
2FB/2FC
1-4-84
2FB/2FC
1-5 Troubleshooting
8
8 4 3 3 3 1
8 4 3 5
5 5
2 2 7
1
1
8
2
1
8 1
8
Figure 1-5-1
1-5-1
2FB/2FC
OFM
ORM OFSW
1
OCM
ORSW
DPTSW1 DPTSW2
ESW RSW
SBESW
FSSW RM FSW1 MPFDM
DUPFSW
DUPCSW1 FDM
DUPSBM
DUPCSW2
DUPSBM DUPCSW3 FSW2
TIMSW1
DUPSRM
DKCSW1
PFM2 DKCSW2 PFM1
FSW3
FSW4
TIMSW2
PFM3
FSW5
TIMSW3
PFM4
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
2FB/2FC
1-5-3
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-4
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-5
2FB/2FC
1-5-6
2FB/2FC
1-5-7
2FB/2FC
1-5-8
2FB/2FC
1-5-9
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-10
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-11
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-12
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-13
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-14
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-15
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-16
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-17
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-18
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-19
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-20
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-21
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-22
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-23
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-23-1
1-5-24
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-25
2FB/2FC
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
012345678901234
C0460
Figure 1-5-1
Table1-5-1
1-5-24
2FB/2FC
Code Contents
C0250 Network scanner board* communication problem
C0410 DP communication problem
C0420 Side feeder* communication error
C0640 Hard disk problem
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 Lift motor 2 error
C1030 Lift motor 3 error
C1040 Lift motor 4 error
C1140 Side feeder lift motor going up error (optional side feeder)
C1150 Side feeder lift motor going down error (optional side feeder)
C1200 Duplex side registration motor error
C2640 Side feeder drive motor error
C3210 Exposure lamp problem
C3310 Optical system (AGC) problem (DP)
C8010 Document finisher* paper conveying motor problem
C8020 Document finisher* punch motor problem
C8030 Document finisher* upper paper conveying belt problem
C8040 Document finisher* lower paper conveying belt problem
C8140 Document finisher* main tray problem
C8150 Document finisher* multi job tray problem
C8170 Document finisher* front upper side registration guide problem
C8180 Document finisher* rear upper side registration guide problem
C8190 Document finisher* lower side registration guide problem
C8210 Document finisher* front stapler problem
C8220 Document finisher* front clincher problem
C8230 Document finisher* rear stapler problem
C8240 Document finisher* rear clincher problem
C8300 Document finisher* centerfold unit communication problem
C8310 Document finisher* centerfold unit side registration guide problem
C8320 Document finisher* centerfold unit centering plate problem
C8330 Document finisher* centerfold blade problem
C9040 DP lift motor going up error
C9050 DP lift motor going down error
C9060 DP EEPROM error
C9070 Communication problem between DP and SHD
C9080 Communication problem between DP and CIS
*Optional.
1-5-25
2FB/2FC
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0060 Main PWB type mismatch error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC26 on
connector termi- the main PWB and relay board, and the con-
nals. tinuity across the connector terminals.
Repair if necessary.
If the problem is not solved, run mainte-
nance item U935 (see page 1-4-73) and
return the relay board to the Service Admin-
istrative Division.
C0100 Backup memory read/write problem Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
• Read and write data does not match. PWB. rect operation.
C0110 Backup memory data problem (main Problem with the Run maintenance item U021 to set the con-
PWB) backup memory tents of the backup memory data again.
• Data in the specified area of the data.
backup memory does not match the
Defective main If the C0110 is displayed after initializing the
specified values.
PWB. backup memory, replace the main PWB and
check for correct operation.
C0130 Backup memory (EEPROM) device Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
problem PWB. rect operation.
Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
EEPROM.
C0140 Backup memory (EEPROM) data Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
problem EEPROM.
C0150 Backup memory device problem Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
(Engine PWB) EEPROM.
• An error occurs in backup data read or
write for the engine PWB.
C0160 Backup memory data problem Problem with the Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the
(Engine PWB) backup memory backup memory data (see page 1-4-11).
• Data for backup data check is data.
changed at the check after startup.
Defective engine If the C0160 is displayed after initializing the
PWB. backup memory, replace the engine PWB
and check for correct operation.
C0170 Copy counts problem Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
• A checksum error is detected in the EEPROM.
main and engine backup memories for
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
the copy counters.
PWB. rect operation.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C0180 Machine number mismatch error Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
• Machine number of main PWB and EEPROM.
engine PWB does not match.
1-5-26
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0210 CPU communication problem Defective main Replace the main PWB.
• Synchronization cannot be taken PWB.
between the main CPU and engine
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC1 on
CPU.
connector termi- the main PWB and YC1 on the engine PWB,
nals. and the continuity across the connector ter-
minals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
C0220 CPU communication problem Defective main Replace the main PWB.
• Synchronization cannot be taken PWB.
between the main CPU and scanner
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 on
CPU.
connector termi- the engine PWB and YC5 on the scanner
nals. PWB, and the continuity across the connec-
tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner PWB.
PWB.
C0240 Printer board* communication prob- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC9 on
lem connector termi- the main PWB and YC5 on the printer
• The printer board does not respond nals. board, and the continuity across the connec-
120 seconds after the power is turned tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
on.
DIMM installed Check the connection. Repair or replace if
incorrectly. necessary.
Defective main Replace the main PWB or printer board and
PWB or printer check for correct operation.
board.
C0250 Network scanner board* communica- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC3 on
tion problem connector termi- the main PWB and the connector on the net-
• The response to the alive command to nals. work scanner board, and the continuity
the network scanner transmitted once across the connector terminals. Repair or
to 30 s does not come on the contrary replace if necessary.
three consecutive times or more.
Defective main Replace the main PWB or network scanner
• The response to the communication
PWB or network board and check for correct operation.
command transmitted to the network
scanner board.
scanner does not return 75 s or more.
C0330 Relay board communication problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC26 on
connector termi- the main PWB and relay board, and the con-
nals. tinuity across the connector terminals.
Repair if necessary.
If the problem is not solved, run mainte-
nance item U935 (see page 1-4-73) and
return the relay board to the Service Admin-
istrative Division.
C0410 DP communication problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on
• There is no reply after 5 retries at com- connector termi- the scanner PWB and YC1 on the DP main
munication or a communication error nals. PWB, and the continuity across the connec-
occurs. tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
1-5-27
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0420 Side feeder* communication error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
• Reception is not normally completed connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector YC3 on
even after 40 times of retry at startup nals. the side feeder main PWB, and the continu-
or 5 times of retry in normal operation. ity across the connector terminals. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective side Replace the side feeder main PWB.
feeder main PWB.
C0440 Document finisher communication Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC14 on
problem (optional document finisher) connector termi- the engine PWB and YC4 on the finisher
• A communication error from document nals. main PWB, and the continuity across the
finisher is detected 10 times in succes- connector terminals. Repair or replace if
sion. necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB.
main PWB.
C0460 Duplex unit communication problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 on
• A communication error from duplex connector termi- the engine PWB and YC2 on the duplex
section is detected 10 times in succes- nals. PWB, and the continuity across the connec-
sion. tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective duplex Replace the duplex PWB.
PWB.
C0500 Paper feed unit communication error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC3 on
(cassette 1 and 2) connector termi- the engine PWB and YC2 on the deck PWB,
• A communication error is detected 10 nals. and the continuity across the connector ter-
times in succession. minals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
C0510 Paper feed unit communication error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC4 on
(cassette 3 and 4) connector termi- the engine PWB and YC2 on the cassette
• A communication error is detected 10 nals. PWB, and the continuity across the connec-
times in succession. tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
C0610 Bitmap problem Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
• The DIMM on the scanner main PWB PWB. rect operation.
does not operate correctly.
C0630 DMA problem Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
• DMA transmission of compressed, PWB. rect operation.
decompressed, rotated, relocated or
blanked-out image data does not com-
plete within the specified period of
time.
1-5-28
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0640 Hard disk problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC11 on
• The hard disk cannot be accessed. connector termi- the engine PWB and the hard disk, and the
nals. continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective hard Run U906 (Resetting partial operation con-
disk. trol) to cancel partial operation control.
Run U024 (HDD formatting) without turning
the power off to initialize the hard disk.
Replace the hard disk drive and check for
correct operation if the problem is still
detected after initialization.
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
Defective cable. Replace cable of the hard disk.
C0700 Side feeder EEPROM error (optional Defective side Replace the side feeder main PWB.
side feeder) feeder main PWB.
• An error occurs in EEPROM (U4) data
read or write for the side feeder main
PWB.
C0750 Document finisher* EEPROM error Defective optional Replace the document finisher with another
• A backup memory error is received in document finisher. unit and check the operation. If the operation
serial communication data from the fin- is normal, replace or repair the document
isher. finisher (see the service manual for the doc-
ument finisher).
C0960 Developing unit EEPROM error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
connector termi- the engine PWB and the developing unit,
nals. and the continuity across the connector ter-
minals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective develop- Replace the developing unit (see page 1-6-
ing unit. 60).
C0970 Cleaning unit EEPROM error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
connector termi- the engine PWB and the cleaning unit, and
nals. the continuity across the connector termi-
nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective cleaning Replace the cleaning unit (see page 1-6-66).
unit.
1-5-29
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1010 Lift motor 1 error Broken gears or Replace lift motor 1.
• When cassette 1 is inserted, lift limit couplings of lift
switch 1 does not turn on within 33 s of motor 1.
lift motor 1 turning on.
Defective lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
• During copying, lift limit switch 1 does
1. replace lift motor 1.
not turn on within 1 s of lift motor 1
turning on. Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
motor 1 connector nuity within the connector cable. If none,
terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective lift limit Run maintenance item U031 and turn lift
switch 1. limit switch 1 on and off manually. Replace
lift limit switch 1 if indication of the corre-
sponding sensor on the touch panel is not
displayed in reverse.
Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
limit switch 1 con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
nector terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective deck Replace the deck PWB.
PWB.
C1020 Lift motor 2 error Broken gears or Replace lift motor 2.
• When cassette 2 is inserted, lift limit couplings of lift
switch 2 does not turn on within 33 s of motor 2.
lift motor 2 turning on.
Defective lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
• During copying, lift limit switch 2 does
2. replace lift motor 2.
not turn on within 1 s of lift motor 2
turning on. Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
motor 2 connector nuity within the connector cable. If none,
terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective lift limit Run maintenance item U031 and turn lift
switch 2. limit switch 2 on and off manually. Replace
lift limit switch 2 if indication of the corre-
sponding sensor on the touch panel is not
displayed in reverse.
Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
limit switch 2 con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
nector terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective deck Replace the deck PWB.
PWB.
1-5-30
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1030 Lift motor 3 error Broken gears or Replace lift motor 3.
• When cassette 3 is inserted, lift limit couplings of lift
switch 3 does not turn on within 33 s of motor 3.
lift motor 3 turning on.
Defective lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
• During copying, lift limit switch 3 does
3. replace lift motor 3.
not turn on within 1 s of lift motor 3
turning on. Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
motor 3 connector nuity within the connector cable. If none,
terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective lift limit Run maintenance item U031 and turn lift
switch 3. limit switch 3 on and off manually. Replace
lift limit switch 3 if indication of the corre-
sponding sensor on the touch panel is not
displayed in reverse.
Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
limit switch 3 con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
nector terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective casette Replace the casette PWB
PWB.
C1040 Lift motor 4 error Broken gears or Replace lift motor 4.
• When cassette 4 is inserted, lift limit couplings of lift
switch 4 does not turn on within 33 s of motor 4.
lift motor 4 turning on.
Defective lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
• During copying, lift limit switch 4 does
4. replace lift motor 4.
not turn on within 1 s of lift motor 4
turning on. Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
motor 4 connector nuity within the connector cable. If none,
terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective lift limit Run maintenance item U031 and turn lift
switch 4. limit switch 4 on and off manually. Replace
lift limit switch 4 if indication of the corre-
sponding sensor on the touch panel is not
displayed in reverse.
Poor contact of lift Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
limit switch 4 con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
nector terminals. repair or replace the cable.
Defective casette Replace the casette PWB.
PWB.
C1140 Side feeder lift motor going up error Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional side feeder) upper limit detec- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• Upper limit detection switch does not tion switch connec- repair or replace the cable.
turn off within 15 s of the side feeder tor terminals.
lift motor starting (within 200 ms during
Defective side Replace the side feeder main PWB.
paper feeding).
feeder main PWB.
Defective side Run maintenance mode U247 and measure
feeder lift motor. the voltage between terminals YC5-A12
(side feeder main circuit board) and YC6-
B11. (Make sure all of LUSSW, UCSSW,
LLSSW and RCSSW are off.)
Despite either DC24V or DC-24V is
observed but if the side feeder lift motor
does not operate, replace the side feeder lift
motor.
1-5-31
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1150 Side feeder lift motor going down Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
error (optional side feeder) lower limit detec- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• Lower limit detection switch does not tion switch connec- repair or replace the cable.
turn off within 15 s of the side feeder tor terminals.
lift motor starting (within 200 ms during
Defective side Replace the side feeder main PWB.
paper feeding).
feeder main PWB.
Defective side Run maintenance mode U247 and measure
feeder lift motor. the voltage between terminals YC5-A12
(side-feeder main circuit board) and YC6-
B11. (Make sure all of LUSSW, UCSSW,
LLSSW and RCSSW are off.)
Despite either DC24V or DC-24V is
observed but if the side-feeder lift motor
does not operate, replace the side-feeder lift
motor.
C1200 Duplex side registration motor error Defective duplex Check the connection of connector YC29 on
• The duplex side registration home side registration the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on
position sensor does not detect the home position sen- the duplex PWB. Repair or replace if neces-
home position of the side registration sor. sary.
guide.
Defective duplex Replace the duplex side registration motor.
side registration
motor.
Defective duplex Replace the duplex PWB.
PWB.
C2100 Developing motor error Poor contact in the Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• LOCK signal remains high for 1 s, 1 s developing motor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
after the developing motor has turned connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
on. nals.
Defective develop- Replace the developing motor.
ing motor rotation
control circuit.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective duplex Replace the duplex PWB.
PWB.
C2200 Drive motor error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 and
• LOCK signal remains high for 1 s, 1 s drive motor con- YC11 on the deck PWB. Reinsert the con-
after the drive motor has turned on. nector terminals. nector. Also check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, remedy or replace
the cable.
Defective drive Replace the drive motor.
motor rotation con-
trol circuit.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective deck Replace the deck PWB or the engine PWB.
PWB or engine
PWB.
1-5-32
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C2300 Fuser motor error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 and
• LOCK signal remains high for 1 s, 1 s fuser motor con- YC4 on the duplex PWB. Reinsert the con-
after the fuser motor has turned on. nector terminals. nector. Also check for continuity within the
connector cable. If none, remedy or replace
the cable.
Defective fuser Replace the fuser motor.
motor rotation con-
trol circuit.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly.
transmission sys- If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check
tem. for broken gears and replace if any.
Defective duplex Replace the duplex PWB or the engine
PWB or engine PWB.
PWB.
C2550 Transfer motor error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 and
• LOCK signal remains high for 1 s, 1 s transfer motor con- YC3 on the cassette PWB and YC4 on the
after the transfer motor has turned on. nector terminals. engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also
check for continuity within the connector
cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective transfer Replace the transfer motor.
motor rotation con-
trol circuit.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective cassette Replace the cassette PWB or the engine
PWB or engine PWB.
PWB.
C2640 Side feeder drive motor error Overloaded side Verify that the side feeder motor or the paper
feeder drive motor feeding mechanism is not interrupted by any
objects.
Defective side Replace the side feeder drive motor.
feeder drive motor.
Defective side Replace the side feeder main PWB.
feeder main PWB.
C3100 Scanner carriage problem Defective scanner Replace the scanner PWB and check for
• The home position is not correct when PWB. correct operation.
the power is turned on or at the start of
Defective scanner Replace the scanner home position switch.
copying using the MP tray.
home position
switch.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner motor.
motor.
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2,
connector termi- YC5 and YC10 on the scanner PWB and the
nals. continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective mirror Check if the mirror flames and exposure
flame, exposure lamp are on the rail. And check the scanner
lamp or scanner wire winds correctly.
wire.
1-5-33
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C3200 Exposure lamp problem Defective scanner Replace the scanner PWB and check for
• Check the CCD input value for the PWB. correct operation.
lighting status of the exposure lamp
Defective exposure Replace the exposure lamp or inverter
500 ms after the exposure lamp is lit
lamp or inverter PWB.
and the carriage is moved to the shad-
PWB.
ing position. If the exposure lamp does
not light, a further 100 ms later, check Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass
the CCD input. The exposure lamp position. (shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
does not light after 50 retries. replace the scanner home position switch.
Poor contact of the Check the connection of connectors YC3,
connector termi- YC4 and YC5 on the scanner PWB, YC5,
nals. YC6 and YC8 on the SHD PWB and YC1,
YC2 and YC3 on the CCD PWB, and the
continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective CCD Replace the CCD PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C3210 CIS lamp problem Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
• After the reading starting, when input PWB. correct operation.
value at the time of CIS illumination
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 on
does not exceed the threshold value
connector termi- the DP main PWB and the continuity across
between 5 s.
nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective CIS. Replace CIS and check for correct operation
(see page 1-6-87).
Defective DP Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for
inverter PWB. correct operation.
C3300 Optical system (AGC) problem Insufficient expo- Replace the exposure lamp or inverter
• After AGC, correct input is not sure lamp luminos- PWB.
obtained at CCD. ity.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass
position. (shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position sensor.
CCD PWB output Replace the ISU (see page 1-6-46).
problem.
Poor contact of the Check the connection of connectors YC5,
connector termi- YC6 and YC8 on the SHD PWB and YC1,
nals. YC2 and YC3 on the CCD PWB, and the
continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
C3310 Optical system (AGC) problem (DP) Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
• After AGC, correct input is not PWB. correct operation.
obtained at CIS.
CIS output prob- Replace CIS (see page 1-6-87).
lem.
Defective DP Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for
inverter PWB. correct operation.
1-5-34
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C3500 Communication error between scan- Defective SHD Replace the SHD PWB and check for cor-
ner and SHD PWB. rect operation.
• An error code is detected.
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC3 on
connector termi- the scanner PWB and YC4 on the SHD
nals. PWB, and the continuity across the connec-
tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
C3900 Backup memory read/write error Defective back up Replace the scanner PWB and check for
(scanner PWB) RAM or scanner correct operation.
• Read and write data does not match. PWB.
C3910 Backup memory read/write error Problem with the Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the
(scanner PWB) backup memory backup memory data.
• Data in the specified area of the data.
backup memory does not match the
Defective scanner If the C3910 is displayed after initializing the
specified values.
PWB. backup memory, replace the main PWB and
check for correct operation.
C4000 Polygon motor synchronization prob- Poor contact in the Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
lem polygon motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The revolution does not reach the sta- nector terminals. remedy or replace the cable.
ble speed within 20 s of the START
Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
signal.
motor. 6-42).
Defective engine Check if 24 V DC is supplied to YC17-1 on
PWB. the engine PWB. If not, replace the engine
PWB.
C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem Poor contact in the Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• The polygon motor rotation is not sta- polygon motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
ble for 5 s after the polygon motor rota- nector terminals. remedy or replace the cable.
tion has been stabilized.
Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
motor. 6-42).
Defective engine Check if 24 V DC is supplied to YC17-1 on
PWB. the engine PWB. If not, replace the engine
PWB.
C4100 BD initialization (A) problem Defective laser Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
• When power is turned on, only laser A scanner unit. 6-42).
is output and ASIC of main PWB
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
detects a BD error for 2000 ms.
PWB. rect operation.
Poor contact in Check the connection of connector YC8 on
connector termi- the main PWB. Repair or replace if neces-
nals. sary.
C4110 BD initialization (B) problem Defective laser Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
• When power is turned on, only laser B scanner unit. 6-42).
is output and ASIC of main PWB
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
detects a BD error for 2000 ms.
PWB. rect operation.
Poor contact in Check the connection of connector YC8 on
connector termi- the main PWB and the continuity across the
nals. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
1-5-35
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C4120 BD initialization (C) problem Defective laser Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
• When power is turned on, only laser C scanner unit. 6-42).
is output and ASIC of main PWB
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
detects a BD error for 2000 ms.
PWB. rect operation.
Poor contact in Check the connection of connector YC8 on
connector termi- the main PWB and the continuity across the
nals. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
C4200 BD steady-state problem Defective laser Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
• ASIC of the main PWB detects a BD diode. 6-42).
error A for 4000 ms after the polygon
Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-
motor rotation has been stabilized.
motor. 6-42).
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
Poor contact in Check the connection of connector YC8 on
connector termi- the main PWB and the continuity across the
nals. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
C5100 Main high-voltage error Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB and check
• While the main high-voltage output age PWB. for correct operation.
remote signal is on, an alarm signal is
Leak of main high- Check the main charger unit and replace if
detected continuously for 400 ms.
voltage. necessary (see page 1-6-31).
Poor contact in Check the connection of connector YC7 on
connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
C5500 Drum surface potential sensor prob- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
lem 1 drum surface the engine PWB. Reinsert the connector.
• The sensor output is 0.5 V or less potential sensor Also check for continuity within the connec-
when MC REM signal is turned on. connector termi- tor cable. If none, repair or replace the
nals. cable.
Defective drum Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
surface potential
sensor.
Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB and check
age PWB. for correct operation.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C5510 Drum surface potential sensor prob- Defective drum Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
lem 2 surface potential
• The sensor output is 4.5 V or more sensor.
when the MC REM signal is turned on.
Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB and check
age PWB. for correct operation.
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
drum surface the engine PWB. Reinsert the connector.
potential sensor. Also check for continuity within the connec-
tor cable. If none, remedy or replace the
cable.
1-5-36
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C5600 Drum surface potential problem 1 Deteriorated main Check the main charger wire and replace it if
• Grid voltage at 4.5 V could not deter- charger. necessary (see page 1-6-33).
mine the potential.
Grid or main Clean the grid or main charger shield if nec-
• Potential adjustment in 30 times could
charger shield is essary.
not raise the potential sensor value to
dirty.
the predetermined.
Defective drum Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
surface potential
sensor.
Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB and check
age PWB. for correct operation.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C5610 Drum surface potential problem 2 Defective drum Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
• Grid voltage at 0.3 V could not deter- surface potential
mine the potential. sensor.
• Potential adjustment in 30 times could
Defective high volt- Replace the high voltage PWB and check
not lower the potential sensor value to
age PWB. for correct operation.
the predetermined.
Defective drum. Replace the drum (see page 1-6-56).
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
C6000 Fuser heater lamp break Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
• The fuser temperature does not tiveness on fuser mistor M and S. If any problem is found,
increase for 40 s after the fuser heat- thermistor M and S. repair it.
ers have been turned on for warming
Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermostat (see page 1-6-
up.
thermostat. 75).
• The fuser temperature remains below
50 °C/122 °F for 10 s continuously Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
after the fuser heaters have been tiveness on fuser mistor L, M and S. If any problem is found,
turned on during stabilization. heater L, M or S. repair it.
Broken fuser Check for continuity. If none, replace the
heater L, M and S fuser heater L, M and S (see page 1-6-76).
wire.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective AC Replace the AC power source PWB.
power source
PWB.
C6020 Fuser thermistor high-temperature Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
detection error tiveness on fuser mistor M and S. If any problem is found,
• The fuser temperature exceeds 235 thermistor M and S. repair it.
°C/455 °F for 10 s. Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermistor M and S (see
• The fuser high-temperature signal is thermistor M and page 1-6-75).
detected for continous 500 ms. S.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
1-5-37
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C6030 Fuser thermistor break error Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
• The fuser temperature remains at PWB.
lower then 1 °C/33.8 °F for 30 s con-
Defective AC Replace the AC power source PWB.
tinuously when the fuser heater is on. power source
PWB.
Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
tiveness on fuser mistor M and S. If any problem is found,
thermistor M and S. repair it.
C6050 Fuser thermistor abnormal tempera- Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
ture detection tiveness on fuser mistor M and S. If any problem is found,
• During copying, the temperature at the thermistor M and S. repair it.
heat roller lower than 120 °C/248 °F is
Operation on fuser Check for continuity. If none, replace the
detected continuously for 5 s. thermostat. fuser thermostat.
Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
tiveness on fuser mistor L, M and S. If any problem is found,
heater L, M or S. repair it.
Broken fuser Check for continuity. If none, replace the
heater L, M and S fuser heater L, M and S (see page 1-6-76).
wire.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
Defective AC Replace the AC power source PWB.
power source
PWB.
C6400 Zero-cross signal error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC11 on
• The engine PWB does not detect the connector termi- the engine PWB and YC6 on the DC power
zero-crossing signal (Z CROSS SIG) nals. source PWB, and the continuity across the
for 5 s. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective DC Check if the zero-crossing signal is output
power source from YC6-3 on the DC power source PWB.
PWB. If not, replace the DC power source PCB.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB if C6400 is
PWB. detected while YC6-3 on the DC power
source PWB outputs the zero-crossing sig-
nal.
C7200 Broken internal thermistor wire Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC23 on
• The thermistor output value is 4.5 V or connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
more. nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective develop- Replace the developing humidity sensor.
ing humidity sen-
sor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
1-5-38
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C7210 Short-circuited internal thermistor Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC23 on
• The thermistor input value is 0.5 V or connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
less. nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective develop- Replace the developing humidity sensor.
ing humidity sen-
sor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
C7300 Toner hopper problem Defective toner Replace the toner level detection sensor.
• During toner replenishment after toner level detection sen-
empty has been detected, toner empty sor.
could not be cleared in 3 times of
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connectors YC2
360 s.
toner level detec- and YC5 on the deck PWB and YC3 on the
tion sensor con- engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also
nector terminals. check for continuity within the connector
cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
C7800 Broken external thermistor wire Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC13 on
• The thermistor output value is 4.5 V or connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
more. nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective humidity Replace the humidity sensor.
sensor.
C7810 Short-circuited external thermistor Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC13 on
• The thermistor input value is 0.5 V or connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
less. nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective humidity Replace the humidity sensor.
sensor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB.
PWB.
C8010 Document finisher* paper conveying Loose connection Check the connection of connector YC14 on
motor problem of the paper con- the finisher main PWB. Reinsert the connec-
• The LOCK signal of the paper convey- veying motor con- tor. Also check for continuity within the con-
ing motor is detected for more than nector. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the
500 ms while the paper conveying cable.
motor is operating.
Defective paper Replace the paper conveying motor and
However, the first 1 s after the paper
conveying motor. check for correct operation.
conveying motor is turned on is
excluded from detection. Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8020 Document finisher* punch motor Loose connection Check the connection of connector YC13 on
problem of the punch motor the finisher main PWB and YC1 on the
• The LOCK signal of the punch motor is connector. punch PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also
detected for more than 500 ms while check for continuity within the connector
the punch motor is operating. cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
However, the first 1 s after the punch
Defective punch Replace the punch motor and check for cor-
motor is turned on is excluded from
motor. rect operation.
detection.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
1-5-39
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8030 Document finisher* upper paper con- Phase shift of the Correct the phase of the upper paper con-
veying belt problem upper paper con- veying belt and check for correct operation.
• During initialization, the intermediate veying belt.
tray upper sliding plate is not detected
Malfunction of the Replace the upper paper conveying belt
in the home position within 3 s after
upper paper con- motor and check for correct operation.
the belt returns to the home position.
veying belt motor.
JAM87 is indicated the first time this
problem occurs. If the problem reoc- Malfunction of the Replace the upper paper conveying belt
curs after initialization when the front upper paper con- home position sensor and check for correct
cover is opened and closed, the prob- veying belt home operation.
lem is in the upper paper conveying position sensor.
belt.
• When the intermediate tray upper slid- Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
ing plate is operated from the home of the upper paper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
position, the upper paper conveying conveying belt remedy or replace the cable.
belt home position sensor does not home position sen-
turn off within 1 s. sor connector.
Incorrect insertion Check whether the intermediate tray
of the intermediate catches are damaged.
tray.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8040 Document finisher* lower paper con- Phase shift of the Correct the phase of the lower paper con-
veying belt problem lower paper con- veying belt and check for correct operation.
• During initialization, the intermediate veying belt.
tray lower sliding plate is not detected
Malfunction of the Replace the lower paper conveying belt
in the home position within 3 s after
lower paper con- motor and check for correct operation.
the belt returns to the home position.
veying belt motor.
JAM87 is indicated the first time this
problem occurs. If the problem reoc- Malfunction of the Replace the lower paper conveying belt
curs after initialization when the front lower paper con- home position sensor and check for correct
cover is opened and closed, the prob- veying belt home operation.
lem is in the lower paper conveying position sensor.
belt.
• When the intermediate tray lower slid- Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
ing plate is operated from the home of the lower paper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
position, the lower paper conveying conveying belt remedy or replace the cable.
belt home position sensor does not home position sen-
turn off within 1 s. sor connector.
Incorrect insertion Check whether the intermediate tray
of the intermediate catches are damaged.
tray.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
1-5-40
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8140 Document finisher* main tray problem Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• When the main tray is not detected by of the main tray nuity within the connector cable. If none,
the main tray upper limit detection sen- elevation motor remedy or replace the cable.
sor or the main tray load detection connector.
sensor within 20 s from the moment it
Malfunction of the Replace the main tray elevation motor and
starts ascending.
main tray eleva- check for correct operation.
• During main tray descent, the main
tion motor.
tray upper limit detection sensor or the
main tray load detection sensor does Malfunction of the Replace the main tray upper limit detection
not turn off within 500 ms after it turns main tray upper sensor and check for correct operation.
on. limit detection sen-
• During main tray ascent, the main tray sor.
upper limit detection sensor or the
main tray load detection sensor stays Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
on for more than 2 s. of the main tray nuity within the connector cable. If none,
upper limit detec- remedy or replace the cable.
tion sensor con-
nector.
Malfunction of the Replace the main tray load detection sensor
main tray load and check for correct operation.
detection sensor.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the main tray nuity within the connector cable. If none,
load detection sen- remedy or replace the cable.
sor connector.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8150 Document finisher* multi job tray Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
problem of the multi job tray nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• When the multi job tray is not detected elevation motor remedy or replace the cable.
by the multi job tray upper limit detec- connector.
tion sensor within 20 s from the
Malfunction of the Replace the multi job tray elevation motor
moment it starts ascending.
multi job tray ele- and check for correct operation.
• During multi job tray descent, the multi
vation motor.
job tray upper limit detection sensor
does not turn off within 500 ms after it Malfunction of the Replace the multi job tray upper limit detec-
turns on. multi job tray upper tion sensor and check for correct operation.
limit detection sen-
sor.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the multi job tray nuity within the connector cable. If none,
upper limit detec- remedy or replace the cable.
tion sensor con-
nector.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
1-5-41
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8170 Document finisher* front upper side Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
registration guide problem of the front upper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the front upper side registration remedy or replace the cable.
side registration guide is not detected guide motor con-
in the home position within 3 s after nector.
the guide returns to the home position.
Malfunction of the Replace the front upper side registration
JAM87 is indicated the first time this
front upper side guide motor and check for correct operation.
problem occurs. If the problem occurs
registration guide
after initialization when the front cover
motor.
is opened and closed, the problem is
in the front upper side registration Malfunction of the Replace the front upper side registration
guide. front upper side guide home position sensor and check for
• When the front upper side registration registration guide correct operation.
guide is operated from the home posi- home position sen-
tion, the front upper side registration sor.
home position sensor does not turn off
within 500 ms. Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the front upper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
side registration remedy or replace the cable.
guide home posi-
tion sensor con-
nector.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8180 Document finisher* rear upper side Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
registration guide problem of the rear upper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the rear upper side registration remedy or replace the cable.
side registration guide is not detected guide motor con-
in the home position within 3 s after nector.
the guide returns to the home position.
Malfunction of the Replace the rear upper side registration
JAM87 is indicated the first time this
rear upper side guide motor and check for correct operation.
problem occurs. If the problem occurs
registration guide
after initialization when the front cover
motor.
is opened and closed, the problem is
in the rear upper side registration Malfunction of the Replace the rear upper side registration
guide. rear upper side guide home position sensor and check for
• When the rear upper side registration registration guide correct operation.
guide is operated from the home posi- home position sen-
tion, the rear upper side registration sor.
home position sensor does not turn off
within 500 ms. Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the rear upper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
side registration remedy or replace the cable.
guide home posi-
tion sensor con-
nector.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
1-5-42
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8190 Document finisher* lower side regis- Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
tration guide problem of the lower side nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the front/rear registration guide remedy or replace the cable.
lower side registration guides are not motor connector.
detected in the home position within 3
Malfunction of the Replace the lower side registration guide
s after the guide returns to the home
lower side registra- motor and check for correct operation.
position. JAM87 is indicated the first
tion guide motor.
time this problem occurs. If the prob-
lem occurs after initialization when the Malfunction of the Replace the lower side registration guide
front cover is opened and closed, the lower side registra- home position sensor and check for correct
problem is in the lower side registra- tion guide home operation.
tion guide. position sensor.
• When the lower side registration guide
is operated from the home position, Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
the lower side registration home posi- of the lower side nuity within the connector cable. If none,
tion sensor does not turn off within 500 registration guide remedy or replace the cable.
ms. home position sen-
sor connector.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8210 Document finisher* front stapler prob- Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
lem of the front stapler nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the front stapler is motor connector. remedy or replace the cable.
not detected in the home position
Malfunction of the Replace the front stapler motor and check
within 500 ms after the front stapler
front stapler motor. for correct operation.
returns to the home position. JAM90 is
indicated the first time this problem Malfunction of the Replace the front stapler home position sen-
occurs. If the problem occurs after ini- front stapler home sor and check for correct operation.
tialization when the front cover is position sensor.
opened and closed, the problem is in
the front stapler. Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• When the front stapler is operated of the front stapler nuity within the connector cable. If none,
from the home position, the front sta- home position sen- remedy or replace the cable.
pler home position sensor does not sor connector.
turn off within 500 ms. Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8220 Document finisher* front clincher Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
problem of the front clincher nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the front clincher motor connector. remedy or replace the cable.
is not detected in the home position
Malfunction of the Replace the front clincher motor and check
within 500 ms after the front clincher
front clincher for correct operation.
returns to the home position. JAM90 is
motor.
indicated the first time this problem
occurs. If the problem occurs after ini- Malfunction of the Replace the front clincher home position
tialization when the front cover is front clincher home sensor and check for correct operation.
opened and closed, the problem is in position sensor.
the front clincher.
• When the front clincher is operated Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
from the home position, the front of the front clincher nuity within the connector cable. If none,
clincher home position sensor does home position sen- remedy or replace the cable.
not turn off within 500 ms. sor connector.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
1-5-43
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8230 Document finisher* rear stapler prob- Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
lem of the rear stapler nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the rear stapler is motor connector. remedy or replace the cable.
not detected in the home position
Malfunction of the Replace the rear stapler motor and check for
within 500 ms after the rear stapler
rear stapler motor. correct operation.
returns to the home position. JAM90 is
indicated the first time this problem Malfunction of the Replace the rear stapler home position sen-
occurs. If the problem occurs after ini- rear stapler home sor and check for correct operation.
tialization when the front cover is position sensor.
opened and closed, the problem is in
the rear stapler. Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• When the rear stapler is operated from of the rear stapler nuity within the connector cable. If none,
the home position, the rear stapler home position sen- remedy or replace the cable.
home position sensor does not turn off sor connector.
within 500 ms. Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8240 Document finisher* rear clincher Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
problem of the rear clincher nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the rear clincher is motor connector. remedy or replace the cable.
not detected in the home position
Malfunction of the Replace the rear clincher motor and check
within 500 ms after the rear clincher
rear clincher motor. for correct operation.
returns to the home position. JAM90 is
indicated the first time this problem Malfunction of the Replace the rear clincher home position
occurs. If the problem occurs after ini- rear clincher home sensor and check for correct operation.
tialization when the front cover is position sensor.
opened and closed, the problem is in
the rear clincher. Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• When the rear clincher is operated of the rear clincher nuity within the connector cable. If none,
from the home position, the rear home position sen- remedy or replace the cable.
clincher home position sensor does sor connector.
not turn off within 500 ms. Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8300 Document finisher* centerfold unit Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
communication problem of the centerfold nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• Communication with the centerfold unit set switch con- remedy or replace the cable.
unit is not possible although the con- nector.
nection is detected.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold unit set switch and
fold unit set switch. check for correct operation.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold unit main PWB and
fold unit main check for correct operation.
PWB.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
1-5-44
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8310 Document finisher* centerfold unit Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
side registration guide problem of the side registra- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the front/rear side tion guide motor remedy or replace the cable.
registration guides are not detected in connector.
the home position within 600 ms after
Malfunction of the Replace the side registration guide motor
the guide returns to the home position.
side registration and check for correct operation.
• When the side registration guide is
guide motor.
operated from the home position, the
side registration guide home position Malfunction of the Replace the side registration guide home
sensor does not turn off within 100 ms. side registration position sensor and check for correct opera-
guide home posi- tion.
tion sensor.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the side registra- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
tion guide home remedy or replace the cable.
position sensor
connector.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold unit main PWB and
fold unit main check for correct operation.
PWB.
C8320 Document finisher* centerfold unit Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
centering plate problem of the centering nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the centering plate plate motor con- remedy or replace the cable.
is not detected in the home position nector.
when the centering plate returns to the
Malfunction of the Replace the centering plate motor and
home position.
centering plate check for correct operation.
motor.
Malfunction of the Replace the centering plate home position
centering plate sensor and check for correct operation.
home position sen-
sor.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the centering nuity within the connector cable. If none,
plate home posi- remedy or replace the cable.
tion sensor con-
nector.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold unit main PWB and
fold unit main check for correct operation.
PWB.
1-5-45
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8330 Document finisher* centerfold blade Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
problem of the centerfold nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• During initialization, the centerfold blade motor con- remedy or replace the cable.
blade is not detected in the home posi- nector.
tion within a specified period of time.
Malfunction of the Replace the centerfold blade motor and
centerfold blade check for correct operation.
motor.
Malfunction of the Replace the centerfold blade home position
centerfold blade sensor and check for correct operation.
home position sen-
sor.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the centerfold nuity within the connector cable. If none,
blade home posi- remedy or replace the cable.
tion sensor con-
nector.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold unit main PWB and
fold unit main check for correct operation.
PWB.
C9040 DP lift motor going up error Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• The pulse count raised to 10000 at lift- of the DP lift motor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
ing, however, the DP lift upper limit connector. remedy or replace the cable.
switch could not be turned on. After
Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor-
one time retry, the DP lift upper limit
DP lift motor. rect operation.
switch could not be turned on.me.
Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift upper limit switch and
DP lift upper limit check for correct operation.
switch.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the DP lift upper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
limit switch con- remedy or replace the cable.
nector.
Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
C9050 DP lift motor going down error Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
• The pulse count raised to 10000 at lift- of the DP lift motor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
ing, however, the DP lift lower limit connector. remedy or replace the cable.
switch could not be turned on. After
Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor-
one time retry, the DP lift lower limit
DP lift motor. rect operation.
switch could not be turned on.me.
Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift lower limit switch and
DP lift lower limit check for correct operation.
switch.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the DP lift lower nuity within the connector cable. If none,
limit switch con- remedy or replace the cable.
nector.
Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
1-5-45-1
1-5-46
2FB/2FC-4
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C9060 DP EEPROM error Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
• Read and write data does not match. PWB. correct operation.
• Data in the specified area of the
Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
backup memory does not match the
EEPROM.
specified values.
C9070 Communication problem between DP Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
and SHD of the SHD PWB. nuity within the connector cable. If none,
• A communication error is detected. remedy or replace the cable.
Defective SHD Replace the SHD PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
C9080 Communication problem between DP Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
and CIS of CIS. nuity within the connector cable. If none,
remedy or replace the cable.
Defective CIS. Replace CIS and check for correct opera-
tion.
1-5-45-2
1-5-47
2FB/2FC-4
(1) No image (2) No image (3) Image is too (4) Background is (5) A white line
appears appears light. visible. appears longitu-
(entirely white). (entirely black). dinally.
See page 1-5-48 See page 1-5-49 See page 1-5-50 See page 1-5-51 See page 1-5-51
(6) A black line (7) A black line (8) One side of the (9) Black dots (10) Image is
appears longitu- appears later- copy image is appear on the blurred.
dinally. ally. darker than the image.
other.
See page 1-5-51 See page 1-5-52 See page 1-5-52 See page 1-5-52 See page 1-5-53
(11) The leading (12) The leading (13) Paper creases. (14) Offset occurs. (15) Image is partly
edge of the edge of the missing.
image is consis- image is spo-
tently mis- radically mis-
aligned with the aligned with the
original. original.
See page 1-5-53 See page 1-5-53 See page 1-5-54 See page 1-5-54 See page 1-5-54
(16) Fusing is poor. (17) Image is out of (18) Image center (19) Image is not (20) There is a regu-
focus. does not align square. lar error
with the original between the
center. centers of the
original and
copy image
when the DP is
used.
See page 1-5-55 See page 1-5-55 See page 1-5-55 See page 1-5-55 See page 1-5-56
1-5-46
2FB/2FC-4
70mm
64mm
64mm
64mm
1-5-47
2FB/2FC
1-5-48
2FB/2FC
1-5-49
2FB/2FC
1-5-50
2FB/2FC-2.0
1-5-51
2FB/2FC
1-5-52
2FB/2FC
1-5-53
2FB/2FC
1-5-54
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-55
2FB/2FC-4
70mm
64mm
64mm
64mm
1-5-56
2FB/2FC-4
Copier
4. Defective duplex PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC4-3 (remote siginal)
on the duplex PWB goes low. If not, replace the duplex PWB.
5. Defective fuser motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the fuser motor oper-
ates when YC4-3 (remote siginal) on the duplex PWB goes low. If
not, replace the fuser motor.
1-5-57
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-58
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-59
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-60
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-61
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-62
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-63
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-64
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-65
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-66
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-67
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-68
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-69
2FB/2FC-4
DP
1-5-70
2FB/2FC-4
1-5-71
2FB/2FC
1-5-72
2FB/2FC
1-5-73
2FB/2FC
DP
1-5-74
2FB/2FC-2.0
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off
before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static
charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be seriously
damaged.
When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-6-1
2FB/2FC
Start
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
End
1-6-2
2FB/2FC-2.0
(1) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of cassette 1 and 2
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the paper feed pulley, forwarding pulley or separation pulley of cassette 1
and 2.
Procedure
Detaching the deck conveying unit
1. Pull out the cassette 1 and 2.
2. Open the front cover and pull the deck con-
veying unit out.
3. While holding the lever in the direction of
arrow, remove the deck conveying unit from
the machine.
Lever
Figure 1-6-1
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-2
1-6-3
2FB/2FC-2.0
Stop ring
Connector
Primary paper feed unit
Band of cassette 1
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-3
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-4
8. Remove the stop ring and slide the joint in
the direction of the arrow.
9. Open the primary paper feed of cassette 1.
Joint
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-5
1-6-4
2FB/2FC-4
Paper feed
pulley unit
Paper feed pulley unit
Figure 1-6-6
Bush
12. Remove two stop rings and bushes from the
Paper feed
paper feed pulley unit, and then pull out the pulley unit
paper feed pulley shaft.
13. Remove the paper feed pulley and paper
feed pulley gear from the paper feed pulley Stop ring
unit.
Paper feed
pulley shaft
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-7
Paper feed
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-8
1-6-5
2FB/2FC-4
One-way
clutch
One-way
clutch
Figure 1-6-9
Figure 1-6-10
17. Remove two stop rings, bearing and bush Stop ring
from the separation pulley unit, and then
remove the separation pulley.
Bush
Stop ring
Separation pulley
Bearing
Figure 1-6-11
1-6-6
2FB/2FC-2.0
Figure 1-6-12
1-6-7
2FB/2FC-4
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-15
Paper feed
pulley unit
Paper feed
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-16
1-6-8
2FB/2FC-2.0
Figure 1-6-17
1-6-9
2FB/2FC-2.0
(2) Detaching and refitting the paper feed pulley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of cassette 3 and 4
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the paper feed pulley, forwarding pulley or separation pulley of cassette 3
and 4.
Explanation of an detaching and refitting procedure is given only a cassette 3 since cassettes 3 and 4 are the same feed
units.
Procedure
1. Pull out cassette 1, 3 and 4.
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
front lower right cover.
Front lower
right cover
Figure 1-6-18
Figure 1-6-19
1-6-10
2FB/2FC-4
Joint
Stop ring
Primary paper
feed unit
Figure 1-6-21
Paper feed
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-22
Paper feed
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-23
1-6-11
2FB/2FC-4
Paper feed
pulley shaft
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-24
Paper feed
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-25
One-way
clutch
One-way
clutch
Figure 1-6-26
1-6-12
2FB/2FC-2.0
Figure 1-6-27
14. Remove the bush and stop ring from the Stop ring
separation pulley unit, and then remove the
separation pulley.
Bush
Stop ring
Separation pulley
Bearing
Figure 1-6-28
Figure 1-6-29
1-6-13
2FB/2FC-3
Procedure
Start
End
Figure 1-6-30
1-6-14
2FB/2FC
Caution
After performing the following adjustment, adjust the position of the damper (see page 1-6-16).
Center line of printing
Procedure
Start
Figure 1-6-31
Press the start key.
Select LSUOUT
on the touch panel.
Yes
Cassette1 or 2
Press the stop/clear key to exit
maintenance mode.
End
Screws
Screw
Screws
Graduation
Figure 1-6-32
1-6-15
2FB/2FC
Procedure
When removing cassette 1 or 2 backwards;
Pull and rotate the damper clockwise for the removed levels.
When removing cassette 1 or 2 forwards;
Pull and rotate the damper counter-clockwise for the removed levels.
The damper is adjustable to 2-level in both clockwise and counter-clockwise directions.
Rotate the damper 1-level clockwise. The damper is at the central position. Rotate the damper
1-level counter-clockwise.
Figure 1-6-33
1-6-16
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the screw and then remove the MP tray
developing fan cover.
2. Open the MP tray.
Developing
fan cover
Figure 1-6-34
Lower right
Pins rear cover
Figure 1-6-35
Figure 1-6-36
1-6-17
2FB/2FC
MP tray
Figure 1-6-37
Connector
MP unit
Figure 1-6-38
1-6-18
2FB/2FC
(6) Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed pulley, MP forwarding pulley and MP separation pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the MP paper feed pulley, MP forwarding pulley and MP separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Remove the MP unit (see page 1-6-17). Projection
Upper MP unit
2. Remove each screw from the MP unit front
and rear.
3. Release the claws of the MP unit front and
rear in the direction of the arrow.
4. Remove the projections from the inserted
parts, and then divide the unit into upper and
lower unit. Projection
Inserted
part
Inserted part
Lower MP unit
Claw Claw
Figure 1-6-39
Upper MP unit
Lever
Figure 1-6-40
1-6-19
2FB/2FC
Joint
Figure 1-6-41
Upper MP unit
Stop ring
Bush
Stop ring
MP paper feed
pulley unit
Bush
Figure 1-6-42
1-6-20
2FB/2FC
Bush
Figure 1-6-43
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-44
One-way
clutch
Figure 1-6-45
1-6-21
2FB/2FC
Stopper
Stop ring
MP separation pulley
Bush
Stopper
Spring
Lower MP unit
Figure 1-6-46
Projection
Groove
Figure 1-6-47
1-6-22
2FB/2FC
Stopper Stopper
Figure 1-6-48
Shaft
Coupling
Figure 1-6-49
1-6-23
2FB/2FC
Procedure
Start
End
Spring
MP unit
Spring
Stoppers
Figure 1-6-50
1-6-24
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Leading edge registration
<Procedure>
Start
Figure 1-6-51
Press the start key.
1-6-25
2FB/2FC-3
(8-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for duplex switchback copying
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and
that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying.
<Caution>
Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Image on Copy Copy
front face example 1 example 2
(reverse face) (reverse face)
Enter maintenance mode.
Figure 1-6-52
Enter 407 using the numeric keys.
End
1-6-26
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Figure 1-6-53
Press the start key.
Select CASSETTE
on the touch panel.
1-6-27
2FB/2FC
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in mainte-
nance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Ejection direction
(reference)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(3 +-1.0 mm) (3 +-1.0 mm)
1-6-28
2FB/2FC-4
<Procedure>
Figure 1-6-55
Start
Touch panel display
Plain
LOW SPEED DATA: Amount of registration slack for
Enter maintenance mode. transportating A3 size paper
HIGH SPEED DATA: Amount of registration slack for
transportating paper smaller than A4 size
Enter 051 using the numeric keys. LOW DUPLEX DATA: Amount of registration slack for
transportating A3 size paper in duplex mode
HIGH DUPLEX DATA: Amount of registration slack for transportating
Press the start key. paper smaller than A4 size in duplex mode
CASSETTE1 DATA: Amount of registration slack for
cassette 1 feed
Select paper type to be adjusted BYPASS DATA: Amount of registration slack for MP feed
on the touch panel. Thick
Plain/Thick/Postcard* LOW SPEED DATA: Amount of registration slack for
*Postcard setting is effective for transportating A3 size paper
only Japanese specification. HIGH SPEED DATA: Amount of registration slack for
transportating paper smaller than A4 size
Select the item to be adjusted CASSETTE1 DATA: Amount of registration slack for
on the touch panel. cassette 1 feed
BYPASS DATA: Amount of registration slack for MP feed
Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the leading
edge of the image missing Yes
or varying randomly (copy Increase the value using the cursor up key.
example 1)?
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy Yes
Decrease the value using the cursor down key.
example 2)?
Setting range: -120 to +120
Changing the value by 1 changes
No the amount of slack by 0.6 mm.
Initial setting
Press the stop/clear key. Plain: 3/Thick: 0
The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
Exit maintenance mode. the smaller the value, the smaller
the amount of slack.
End
1-6-29
2FB/2FC-3
1-6-30
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Open front cover and turn the lever A2 to the
left.
2. Remove the toner container.
3. Remove two screws and then pull out the
image formation unit.
Figure 1-6-57
Lock lever
Connector
Connector
Figure 1-6-58
1-6-31
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1- Main charger grid
6-31).
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
main charger grid.
3. Clean or replace the main charger grid and
then refit the grid to its original position on
the main charger unit.
4. Refit the main charger unit.
Figure 1-6-59
Figure 1-6-61
1-6-32
2FB/2FC-2.0
Caution
Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire.
The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the charger housing.
The cut end of the charger wire must not protrude more than 2 mm from under the charger wire retainer pin.
Use a clean, undamaged tungsten charger wire.
Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.
Clean the charger shield with wet and dry cloth when replacing the charger wire.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the main charger shield.
Procedure
1. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-
6-31).
2. Remove the main charger grid (see page 1- Charger spring
6-32).
3. Remove the main charger wire cleaning pad
(see page 1-6-32).
4. Remove the charger pin and spring, and
then remove the charger wire.
5. Wind the new wire at 4 and 6 turns around Charger spring
one end of the charger spring and trim the Square
end of the wire.
* The length of the twists and the cut wire Front housing
must be less than 2 mm.
6. Hook the other end of the charger spring
onto the charger terminal of the rear hous-
ing, then pass the wire through the notches Charger
terminal
of the rear housing.
7. Hook the wire on to the pulley of the front
housing and turn up.
8. Let the wire through the cut in the rear hous- Charger pin
ing and above the charger pin hole.
9. Strain and fix the wire by inserting the
charger pin at the position where the tip of Rear housing
the charger spring is within the rectangular
frame on the rear housing. Pulley
Figure 1-6-62
10. Cut off the excess wire under the charger
pin so less than 2 mm protrudes.
11. Refit the main charger wire cleaning pad to
the main charger unit.
12. Refit the main charger grid to the main
charger unit.
13. Refit the main charger unit.
1-6-33
2FB/2FC-4
Procedure DP
1. Remove two screws of hinge retainer at the
rear side of the left hinge and then remove
the retainer from DP.
2. Open DP until it becomes perpendicular.
Hinge retainer
Figure 1-6-63
Figure 1-6-64
Figure 1-6-65
1-6-34
2FB/2FC-4
Band Connector
Figure 1-6-66
Exposure lamp
Wire guide
Wire guide
Inserted parts
Figure 1-6-67
Exposure lamp
Figure 1-6-68
1-6-35
2FB/2FC
Pulley
Figure 1-6-69
Guide
Rib
Wire of
the exposure lamp
Figure 1-6-70
1-6-36
2FB/2FC-4
Figure 1-6-71
Figure 1-6-72
5. Remove the middle right cover (see page 1-
6-17).
6. Remove the staple tray.
Remove each screw and then remove the
operation unit right and left covers.
Operation unit Operation unit
left cover right cover
Staple tray
Figure 1-6-73
1-6-37
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-6-74
Figure 1-6-75
9. Remove each screw, and then remove the
front and rear wire holder plates from the
mirror 1 frame.
Mirror 1 frame
Figure 1-6-76
1-6-38
2FB/2FC-3
Lever
Mirror 1 frame
Figure 1-6-77
Figure 1-6-78
Caution
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: (P/N: 2FB1224), gray
Machine rear: (P/N: 2FB1225), black
Frame securing tools
Fitting requires the following tools
Frame securing tools: (P/N: 302FB68290/2FB68290)
Scanner wire stoppers: (P/N: 3596811)
Procedure
1. Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in the fig-
ure and insert two frame securing tools into
the positioning holes at the front and rear of
the machine center to fix the mirror 2 frame
in position.
2. Fit the frame securing tools using each two
screws.
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-6-79
1-6-39
2FB/2FC
3. Hook the round terminals onto the catches on the inside of the scanner unit. (1)
4. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above.
(2)
5. Loop the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the scanner unit right, winding from above to below. (3)
6. Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum three turns from the rear toward the hole in the drum. (4)
7. Insert the locating balls on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum. (5)
8. Wind the scanner wires five turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum. (6)
9. Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires. (7)
10. Loop the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulley at the scanner unit left, winding from below to above. (8)
11. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to above.
(9)
12. Hook the scanner wires around the scanner wire guides at the machine left. (10)
13. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner wire springs. (11)
Figure 1-6-80
1-6-40
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-6-81
1-6-41
2FB/2FC-4
Procedure
1. Remove the hinge retainer and open DP
until it becomes perpendicular (see page 1-
6-34).
2. Remove the left upper cover, right upper
cover and contact glass (see page 1-6-34).
3. Remove the screw and then remove the left
cover.
4. Remove the middle right cover (see page 1-
6-17).
Remove the staple tray, operation unit right
cover, operation unit left cover and operation
unit upper cover (see page 1-6-37).
5. Move the mirror 1 frame to the machine left.
* When moving the mirror 1 frame, do not
touch the exposure lamp.
Left cover
Figure 1-6-82
Bands
Figure 1-6-83
Figure 1-6-84
1-6-42
2FB/2FC
Connectors
Figure 1-6-85
Holes
Figure 1-6-86
Inserted part
Inserted part
Laser scanner
unit
Figure 1-6-87
1-6-43
2FB/2FC-4
Hole Hole
Projection
Projection
Figure 1-6-88
Claw
Inserted parts
Figure 1-6-89
14. Refit three bands of black wire.
15. Refit the operation unit upper cover, opera-
tion unit right cover, operation unit left cover,
staple tray, middle right cover and left cover.
16. Refit the left upper cover, contact glass and
right upper cover.
17. Refit the hinge retainer.
1-6-44
2FB/2FC
1-6-45
2FB/2FC
Caution
After replacing the ISU, perform (6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU (see page 1-6-50).
Procedure
1. Remove two screws of hinge retainer at the
ISU cover
rear side of the left hinge and then remove
the retainer from DP.
2. Remove the upper right cover and contact
glass (see page 1-6-34).
3. Remove four screws and then remove the
ISU cover.
Figure 1-6-90
ISU
Figure 1-6-91
1-6-46
2FB/2FC
Lens number
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7 7
8 8
9 9
X X
Positioning holes
Figure 1-6-92
1-6-47
2FB/2FC
Caution:
Adjust the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller first (see page 1-6-29). Check for the longitudinal square-
ness of the copy image, and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.
Before making the following adjustment, output a 1 dot LINE PG pattern in maintenance item U089 to use as the original
for the adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Figure 1-6-93
Retighten the screw and
Press the start key and make refit the contact glass.
a test copy at 100% magnification.
End
Screw
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-6-94
1-6-48
2FB/2FC-4
Caution:
Perform (6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit first and check for lateral squareness of the copy image. If
squareness is not obtained, perform (6-2) Adjusting the position of ISU (see page 1-6-50).
(6-1)Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit
For the machines using new laser scanner unit, see the next page for the procedure.
Procedure
Start
Select 1 dot-LINE.
Retighten the screw.
Retighten four screws to hold the LSU.
Press the interrupt key. Refit the LSU adjustment plate and
contact glass.
End
Screw
Figure 1-6-96
1-6-49
2FB/2FC-4
New procedure
Start
Fixed screw B
Screw
Figure 1-6-96-2
1-6-49-1
1-6-50
2FB/2FC-4
1-6-51
2FB/2FC
Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral square-
ness not obtained).
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, output a 1 dot LINE PG pattern in maintenance item U089 to use as the original
for the adjustment.
Adjust the pin at the machine front only and never touch the one at the machine rear.
Procedure
Start
End
Pin
Figure 1-6-98
1-6-50
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
When making this adjustment, moire occurs.
<Procedure>
Start
End
1-6-51
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Original Copy Copy
example example 2
Enter maintenance mode.
End
1-6-52
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Scanner center line
Start
Figure 1-6-101
Enter 067 using the numeric keys.
End
1-6-53
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Scanner leading edge registration
Start
End
1-6-54
2FB/2FC-3
(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U404
U403
(P. 1-6-95)
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Ejection direction
(reference)
Scanner Scanner
left margin right margin
(2 +2.0
-1.5 mm) (2 +2.0
-1.5 mm)
Figure 1-6-103
1-6-55
2FB/2FC
Cautions:
Avoid direct sunlight and strong light when detaching and refitting the drum.
Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.
After removing the drum, keep it in the drum case or storage bag to protect the surface from light.
When cleaning drum, rub with a clean cloth.
Procedure
1. Remove the drum heater electrode (see
page 1-6-59). Pin
2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1- Pin
6-31).
3. Remove the cleaning unit (see page 1-6-
66).
4. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
60).
5. Remove each pin at front and rear of the
image formation unit and then open the
drum stopper in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 1-6-104
Bearing
Figure 1-6-105
8. Clean or replace the drum.
9. Refit the bearings and then the drum.
10. Refit the developing unit, cleaning unit, main
charger unit and drum heater electrode.
1-6-56
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-56).
2. Remove two screws and then remove the
front drum flange from the drum.
3. Remove two connectors connected to the
inner side in the front drum flange.
Drum
Figure 1-6-106
Rear drum
flange
Drum stay
Connector
Drum
Figure 1-6-107
1-6-57
2FB/2FC
Drum stay
Drum heater
Figure 1-6-108
1-6-58
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Open the front cover. Turn lever A2 to left.
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
cover.
3. Remove the connector.
Connector Cover
Figure 1-6-108-1
Projection
Figure 1-6-109
Figure 1-6-110
1-6-59
2FB/2FC-4
Developing unit
Connector
Lock stay
Lock position
Figure 1-6-111
Figure 1-6-112
1-6-60
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and pull out the paper
conveying unit. Rear transfer guide
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
rear transfer guide.
Figure 1-6-113
3. Remove the stop ring and bush of the paper
conveying unit front.
4. Remove the connector of the paper convey-
ing unit rear and then push up the transfer
unit.
Transfer unit
Connector
Bush
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-114
1-6-61
2FB/2FC
Band
Connector
Figure 1-6-115
Hole
Coupling
Shaft
Figure 1-6-116
1-6-62
2FB/2FC
Caution:
When handling the transfer belt, hold the both end of the transfer belt (within 10 mm), never touch the surface with bare
hand.
Be careful not so as to adhere grease on the surface of the transfer belt.
Procedure
1. Remove the transfer unit (see page 1-6-61). Inserted shaft
2. Rotate the transfer front guide and fit the Transfer unit
angle of the end of the inserted shaft as
shown in the figure, and then remove the
transfer front guide from the transfer unit.
3. Remove the spring from the transfer unit.
Spring
Figure 1-6-117
Figure 1-6-118
1-6-63
2FB/2FC
Transfer belt
Figure 1-6-119
Tranfer belt
roller
Belt holder
Figure 1-6-120
Figure 1-6-121
1-6-64
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the transfer unit (see page 1-6-61).
2. Remove the transfer belt (see page 1-6-63).
3. Remove the screw of the transfer unit rear
and then remove the terminal, spring and
pin.
* When refitting the spring, make sure that the
wider edge is facing toward the terminal.
Pin
Spring
Terminal
Figure 1-6-122
Transfer unit
Figure 1-6-123
7. Refit the transfer belt to the transfer unit.
8. Refit the transfer unit.
1-6-65
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Open front cover and then remove the
toner container.
2. Remove two screws and pull out the image
formation unit.
3. Remove the connector of the image forma-
tion unit left.
4. Release two gray lock levers of the image
formation unit left.
5. Release two white lock levers of the image
formation unit upper. White lock lever White lock lever
Figure 1-6-124
Cleaning unit
Figure 1-6-125
1-6-66
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the cleaning unit (see page 1-6- Upper cleaning cover
66).
2. Release two claws and then remove the
upper cleaning cover from the cleaning unit.
Claw
Claw
Cleaning unit
Figure 1-6-126
Cleaning unit
Cleaning blade
Figure 1-6-127
Cleaning blade
Cleaning blade
Figure 1-6-128
1-6-67
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Open the front cover. Turn lever A2 to left.
2. Remove the inner cover (see page 1-6-59).
3. Remove the connector and pull out the PTC
unit. Connector
PTC unit
Figure 1-6-129
4. When refitting the PTC unit, fit the cut of the Guide
unit onto the guide, and then insert the unit.
Cut
PTC unit
Figure 1-6-130
Procedure
1. Remove the PTC unit. PTC cleaning pad
2. Open the PTC cleaning pad outside and
remove the pad from the PTC unit.
3. Replace the PTC cleaning pad and attach
the pad to the PTC unit.
4. Refit the PTC unit.
PTC unit
Figure 1-6-131
1-6-68
2FB/2FC-2.0
Precautions
Use the specified tungsten wire for the PTC wire.
The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the PTC housing.
The cut end of the PTC wire must not protrude more than 2 mm from under the charger pin.
Use a clean, undamaged tungsten PTC wire.
Keep the PTC wire taut by stretching the charger spring.
Clean the PTC shield with wet and dry cloth when replacing the PTC wire.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the PTC shield.
Procedure
1. Remove the PTC unit (see page 1-6-68). Front cover
2. Remove the PTC cleaning pad (see page 1-
6-68).
3. Remove the front and rear covers from the
PTC unit.
PTC unit
Rear cover
Figure 1-6-132
Square
Figure 1-6-133
10. Refit the front and rear covers of PTC unit,
PTC cleaning pad to the PTC unit.
11. Refit the PTC unit.
1-6-69
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and pull out the paper
conveying unit.
2. Remove the rear transfer guide.
3. Remove the screw from the paper convey-
ing unit front, and then remove the fuser unit
retainer.
Figure 1-6-134
Figure 1-6-135
1-6-70
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
Fuser unit
2. Remove two screws and then remove the
lower cleaning roller unit from the fuser unit.
Lower cleaning
roller unit
Figure 1-6-136
Figure 1-6-137
1-6-71
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
2. Remove the lower cleaning roller unit (see Fuser unit
page 1-6-71).
3. Turn the nuts of the fuser unit front and rear
with the box end wrench and release the
fuser pressure.
Nut Nut
Figure 1-6-138
Press roller
Figure 1-6-139
1-6-72
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
2. Remove rear pin and front screw, and then Upper fuser cover Pin
remove the upper fuser cover.
Screw
Fuser unit
Figure 1-6-140
Fuser unit
Figure 1-6-141
Figure 1-6-142
1-6-73
2FB/2FC
Left roller of
the cleaning felt
Cleaning felt
Figure 1-6-143
1-6-74
2FB/2FC
Caution
Use the specified thermostat for replacement.
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 1- Fuser thermostat
6-72).
3. Remove two screws and then remove the
fuser thermostat from the fuser unit.
4. Check or replace the fuser thermostat and
attach the thermostat to the fuser unit.
5. Refit the upper fuser cover to the fuser unit.
6. Refit the fuser unit.
Figure 1-6-144
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 1- Fuser thermistor
6-72).
3. Remove each connector and each screw,
Connectors
and then remove the fuser thermistor from Fuser thermistor
the fuser unit.
4. Check or replace the fuser thermistor and
refit the thermistor to the fuser unit.
5. Refit the upper fuser cover to the fuser unit.
6. Refit the fuser unit.
Figure 1-6-145
1-6-75
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover and upper Fuser unit
fuser frame (see page 1-6-72).
3. Remove the screw and then remove the
front fuser cover.
Figure 1-6-146
Terminal of
the fuser heater M
Terminal of
the fuser heater L
Figure 1-6-147
Figure 1-6-148
1-6-76
2FB/2FC
Fuser heater M
Fuser heater S
Figure 1-6-149
Fuser heater L
Figure 1-6-150
Connector
Connector
Figure 1-6-151
1-6-77
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-6-152
Fuser heater M
Figure 1-6-153
1-6-78
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-6-70).
2. Release the fuser pressure.
3. Remove the fuser heater M, S and L with
the rear fuser housing (see page 1-6-76).
4. Remove the C ring, heat roller gear and
fuser joint gear of the fuser unit rear.
Fuser joint gear
C ring
Figure 1-6-154
5. Remove each screw of the fuser unit front
and rear, and then remove the heat roller
retainer.
Figure 1-6-155
Bearing
Fuser unit
Figure 1-6-156
1-6-79
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Open the eject section.
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
metal fitting from the eject section.
3. Remove two screws and then remove the
eject holder from the eject section.
Metal fitting
Eject holder
Figure 1-6-157
Eject guide
Figure 1-6-158
Retainer
Figure 1-6-159
1-6-80
2FB/2FC-2.0
Spring
Eject guide
Separation
claws shaft
Separation
claw
Figure 1-6-160
Procedure
1. Remove the eject guide from the eject sec-
tion (see page 1-6-80).
Eject section
2. Remove the fuser eject upper roller from the
eject section.
3. Remove the two bearings from the fuser
eject upper roller.
4. Replace the fuser eject upper roller and
attach the roller to the eject section.
5. Refit the eject guide.
Bearing
Bearing
Figure 1-6-160-1
1-6-81
2FB/2FC-2.0
Projection
Connector cover
Projection
Figure 1-6-161
Connector
Figure 1-6-161-1
1-6-82
2FB/2FC-4
Hinge retainer
Figure 1-6-161-2
Pin
Screw
Screw DP
Hook
Hook
Graduation
Figure 1-6-162
1-6-82-1
1-6-83
2FB/2FC-2.0
1-6-84
2FB/2FC
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP original feed belt, DP forwarding pulley and DP separation roller
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DP original feed belt, DP forwarding pulley and DP separation roller.
Procedure
1. Open the document processor top cover.
2. Remove two screws and then remove the Document processor Upper original
feed cover
upper original feed cover. top cover
Figure 1-6-163
Figure 1-6-164
1-6-83
2FB/2FC
Original feed
belt unit
Figure 1-6-165
6. Remove the stop ring, pulley and DP origi-
nal feed pulley, and then remove the original
feed belt shaft from the original feed belt
unit.
7. Remove the short original feed belt shaft
from the inserted parts of the original feed
belt unit and then remove the pulley and DP
original feed belt.
Short original
feed belt shaft
Pulley
DP original
Original feed feed belt
belt unit
DP original
feed pulley
Original feed
belt shaft
Pulley
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-166
1-6-84
2FB/2FC
8. Remove the stop ring and bush from the Original feed
original feed pulley unit and pull out the for- pulley unit
warding pulley shaft.
9. Remove the DP forwarding pulley from the
original feed pulley unit.
Forwarding
pulley shaft
DP forwarding pulley
Bush
Figure 1-6-167
Paper feed
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-168
Figure 1-6-169
1-6-85
2FB/2FC
Torque limiter
Figure 1-6-170
1-6-86
2FB/2FC
Procedure
1. Open the document processor top cover.
Original switchback guide
2. Remove two screws and then remove the
original switchback guide.
Figure 1-6-171
DP front cover
Figure 1-6-172
1-6-87
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-6-173
6. Remove the connector and two screws and
pull out CIS from DP.
Note the position of the graduation of the
retainer.
7. Clean or replace CIS.
Connector
Graduation
CIS
Figure 1-6-174
CIS
Figure 1-6-175
1-6-88
2FB/2FC
Figure 1-6-176
Figure 1-6-177
11. Insert the flexible flat cable between CIS
SHD PWB and guide.
Flexible flat cable Flexible flat cable
Guide
Figure 1-6-178
12. Refit CIS using two screws, adjusting to the
installed position of the graduation of the
retainer.
13. Connect the connector.
14. Refit the DP front cover and original switch-
back guide to DP.
1-6-89
2FB/2FC
Procedure
Start
Press the start key and Refit the upper original cover and
make a test copy. close the document processor cover.
End
Adjusting lever
Figure 1-6-179
1-6-90
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Main scanning
direction
Auxiliary
Start
scanning
direction
1-6-91
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
<Procedure>
Reference
Start
1-6-92
2FB/2FC-3
<Caution>
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Start
1-6-93
2FB/2FC
Start
Original
Enter maintenance mode. Copy Copy Copy
example 1 example 2 example 3
1-6-94
2FB/2FC
(8) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DP
Perform the following adjustment if margins are not correct.
U402 U403
U404
(P. 1-6-28) (P. 1-6-55)
<Caution>
Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
<Procedure>
Start
Figure 1-6-184
1-6-95
2FB/2FC
1-6-12 Others
Procedure
1. Remove the two pins and then remove the
lower right rear cover.
Pins
Lower right
rear cover
Figure 1-6-185
Figure 1-6-186
1-6-96
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Remove the screw and then remove the
developing fan cover.
Developing
fan cover
Figure 1-6-187
Figure 1-6-188
Procedure
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove developing front fan filter 1 and 2.
3. Replace developing front fan filter 1 and 2,
and attach the filters.
Developing front
fan filter 1
Developing front
fan filter 2
Figure 1-6-189
1-6-97
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Remove the image formation fan cover
while pushing the lever.
Lever
Image formation
fan cover
Figure 1-6-190
Image formation
fan filter
Figure 1-6-191
1-6-98
2FB/2FC-2.0
Procedure
1. Open the front cover.
2. Release three inserted parts of the duct Front cover
inner cover and then remove the duct inner
cover from the front cover.
Inserted parts
Inserted part
Figure 1-6-192
Front cover
filter 1
Front cover
filter 2
Front cover
filter 3
Figure 1-6-193
1-6-99
2FB/2FC-4
Procedure
1. Remove two screws and then remove the
rear duct A.
Remove three screws and then remove the
rear duct B.
Rear duct A
Rear duct B
Figure 1-6-194
Ozone filter 1
Rear duct A
Figure 1-6-195
Rear duct B
1-6-100
2FB/2FC-2.0
Figure 1-6-196
Ozone filter 3
Figure 1-6-197
1-6-101
2FB/2FC-4
NOTE
When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.
Procedure
1. Press the Power key on the operation panel
to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off
before turning off the main power switch. Projection
And then unplug the power cable from the
wall outlet.
CF cover
* Turning off the main power switch before
pressing the Power key to off may cause
damage to the equipped hard disk.
2. Remove the screw and release the projec-
tion.
Remove the CF cover.
Figure 1-7-1
Figure 1-7-2
Caution
Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading.
6. [Completed] is displayed on the message display when upgrading is complete.
7. Press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the
main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
* Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped
hard disk.
8. Remove the CF cover.
9. Remove Compact Flash from the machine.
10. Insert the projection of the CF cover to the shield box and refit the CF cover using the screw.
11. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on.
1-7-1
2FB/2FC-2.0
Socket
EEPROM
Figure 1-7-3
1-7-2
2FB/2FC-2.0
Socket
EEPROM
Figure 1-7-4
Socket
Scanner PWB
Figure 1-7-5
1-7-3
2FB/2FC-3
NOTE
When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.
Procedure
1. Press the Power key on the operation panel
to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off download end
before turning off the main power switch. [∗ ∗ ∗ ∗]
And then unplug the power cable from the
wall outlet.
* Turning off the main power switch before
pressing the Power key to off may cause
damage to the equipped hard disk.
2. Insert Compact Flash which has firmware
into the printer board.
3. Insert the power plug and turn the main
Reset
power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts.
Figure 1-7-6
Caution
If pressing the Reset button shown on Fig-
ure 1-7-6, upgrading the firmware will start
again and if turn the main power switch off
before the download is finished, writing for
the program will not finish till the end and
[Checksum error F010] will occur.
1-7-4
2FB/2FC
51 54 ()
(4 (3 (0
5. 50
5-
! 52 5) (, (/ 5,
53 (1 (2
# *
5/ % (.
+
&
(-
"
' '
$ $
2-1-1
2FB/2FC
DKPWB EPWB
DK SCLK
YC2-A10 YC3-A4
DK RDY
YC2-A9 YC3-A5
DK SDI
YC2-A12 YC3-A2
DK SDO
YC2-A11 YC3-A3
DK SEL
YC2-A8 YC3-A6
FEED B SW
YC3-A7
PFM1
2-1-2
2FB/2FC
5) 5- (/
'
53
$ *
54 51 %
5, 52
+
# &
!
"
(2
(0 (-
(3 (, (1 (4
()
(.
(0
(3 (2
(.
2-1-3
2FB/2FC
CSPWB EPWB
CS RDY
YC2-6 YC4-9
CS SEL
YC2-5 YC4-10
CS SDI
YC2-9 YC4-6
CS SDO
YC2-8 YC4-7
CS SCLK
YC2-7 YC4-8
FSW C FSW3
YC5-B5
FSW D
YC5-B8
FSW E
YC5-B11
FSW4
FEED D1 SW
YC4-23
PE SW3 PESW3
YC4-9 TIMSW2
LMT SW3
YC4-3
LILSW3
PF MOT3 A, PF MOT3 B PFM3
YC6-11, 6-12 PF MOT3 /A, PF MOT3 /B
YC6-13, 6-14
FEED E1 SW FSW5
YC4-24
PE SW4 PESW4
YC4-10 TIMSW3
LMT SW4
YC4-4
LILSW4
PF MOT4 A, PF MOT4 B PFM4
YC6-7, 6-8
PF MOT4 /A, PF MOT4 /B
YC6-9, 6-10
VF MOT4 /B, VF MOT4 B
YC6-1, 6-3 VF MOT4 A, VF MOT4 /A
YC6-4, 6-6 VFDM
2-1-4
2FB/2FC
(. (1
(3 (4
(,
(2
(0
()
(-
+ !
"
#
&
$
*
' %
2-1-5
2FB/2FC
EPWB DUPPWB
DUP SCLK
YC2-A4 YC2-A8
DUP SDI
YC2-A2 YC2-A10
DUP SDO
YC2-A3 YC2-A9
DUP SEL
YC2-A6 YC2-A6
DUP RDY
YC2-A5 YC2-A7
FEED A SW
YC2-A10
REG SW
YC2-A9
2-1-6
2FB/2FC
"
% &
$ '
*
2-1-7
2FB/2FC
EPWB DKPWB
YC3-A2 DK SDI YC2-A12
YC3-A3 DK SDO
YC2-A11
YC3-A4 DK SCLK
YC2-A10
DK RDY
YC3-A5 YC2-A9
DK SEL
YC3-A6 YC2-A8
MP SOL PUL
YC3-A8
MP SOL ATC
YC3-A9 MPTSW
MPSOL
MP SET SW SIG MPPLSW
YC3-A10
MPPESW
MP MOT CLK
YC3-B9 YC2-B5
MP MOT REM MPPWSW
YC3-B8 YC2-B6
MP MOT HLD
YC3-B7 YC2-B7
MP MOT MODE
YC3-B6 YC2-B8
MP MOT CWB
YC3-B5 YC2-B9
MP /A, MP A
YC6-1,6-3 MP B, MP /B MPFDM
MP DIG2
YC3-B10 MP DIG1 YC6-4,6-6
YC3-B11 MP DIG0
YC3-B12
MP PSD SW SIG
YC3-A11
MP TRY SW SIG
YC3-A12
Figure 2-1-8 MP tray and MP tray paper feed section block diagram
2-1-8
2FB/2FC
'
$
$ *
&
2-1-9
2FB/2FC-2.0
EPWB
HVPWB
MC REM
4 YC7-9
MC ALM
5 YC7-8
G CONT
6 YC7-7
POTENTIAL SENS
PTS (PWB) YC5-24
CL MOT MC FWD
YC5-6
CLM CL MOT MC REV
YC5-8
DRH
Drum
"
(-
'
$
&
%
#
2-1-10
2FB/2FC
" (- (,
$ ! (1
+ (4
()
# (2
% &
*
'
2-1-11
2FB/2FC
Original
SHPSW OSDS
EL
CCDPWB Image
data
YC1, 2, 3 SM
INPWB SPWB
ORGSW1
YC9-5
SMOT AN, SMOT A
YC10-1, 10-3
SMOT B, SMOT BN
YC10-4, 10-6
SLAMPON YC4-3
SHDPWB
HPSW
YC2-4
YC3 YC4
YC2 YC5 YC6, 8, 5
Image data EPWB
YC4 YC2
YC1 YC1
YC8
LSU
BD-, BD+
YC8-B3, B4 PDPWB APCPWB
PLG REM
MPWB YC17-3
PM PLG READY YC17-4
PLG CLK
YC17-5
Drum
2-1-12
2FB/2FC
*
"
(1
(0 (3
' (2 (4 (,
#
()
! (. $
& (1
(4
%
(-
2-1-13
2FB/2FC
"
!
'
(2
(3 (1
#
()
(1 (,
$ (4
(0
(,
&
(.
(-
% +
(/
2-1-14
2FB/2FC
' $
% &
"
!
Figure 2-1-16 Developing section
2-1-15
2FB/2FC
EPWB DKPWB
YC3-A2 DK SDI
YC2-A12
YC3-A3 DK SDO
YC2-A11
YC3-A4 DK SCLK
YC2-A10
DK RDY
YC3-A5 YC2-A9
DK SEL
YC3-A6 YC2-A8
TONER MOT /B, TONER MOT /A
YC6-7, 6-8 TONER MOT B, TONER MOT A
YC6-9, 6-10
CONT SENS
YC3-A13
CONT SET SW
YC3-B13
TCDSW
Toner container
HVPWB
Developing bias (DC + AC) TM
DB
DLP PLS
YC7-3 10
DLP CONT
YC7-4 9
DLP AC REM
YC7-5 8
DLP DC REM
YC7-6 7 Developing TCS
DLP AC CNT roller
YC7-12 6 DEVS
DC bias
Toner
collection
roller
DLP SENS SIG DEVM
YC5-21
DLP REM
YC8-3
DLP CLK
YC8-5
DLP ALM
YC8-4
DUP SDO
YC2-A2 YC2-A10
DUP SDI
YC2-A3 YC2-A9
DUP SCLK
YC2-A4 YC2-A8
DUP RDY
YC2-A5 YC2-A7
DUP SEL
YC2-A6 YC2-A6
DUPPWB
2-1-16
2FB/2FC
Developing blade
Developing blade magnet
Toner
South pole
2-1-17
2FB/2FC
! &
'
" % # * $
'
Figure 2-1-19 Transfer section
EPWB CSPWB
CS RDY
YC4-9 YC2-6
CS SEL
YC4-10 YC2-5
CS SDI
YC4-6 YC2-9
CS SDO Transfer roller
YC4-7 YC2-8
CS SCLK
YC4-8 YC2-7
TRM CLK
YC3-1
TRM ALM
YC4-3 TRM
TRM REM
YC4-4 Transfer bias
(DC- / DC+)
TRF -CNT
YC6-5 CN1-6
TRF +CNT
YC6-7 CN1-5
TRF INV THVPWB CN2
YC6-9 CN1-4
TRF REM
YC6-11 CN1-3
2-1-18
2FB/2FC
'
" !
$
*
& %
EPWB
CL LAMP REM
YC5-5
CL
2-1-19
2FB/2FC
(0 (/
5-
(. (-
5)
5,
()(4
51
(2 (,
(1
54
! (3 +
#
*
"
% &
'
2-1-20
2FB/2FC
FIX TH S SIG
YC12-5
FIX TH M SIG
YC12-3
FIX WEBSOL REM
YC12-2
24V FCSW
YC10-1
FRONT COV SIG
YC10-3
ACPSPWB
TAB5 AC LIVE IN
TAB4 AC NEUTRAL OUT
YC4-4 LIVE IN
YC2-2 HEATER2
TRC
2-1-21
2FB/2FC
'
+
# &
'
$ %
*
!
"
2-1-22
2FB/2FC
EPWB
Drum PCLM
ZPWB
HVPWB
PTC ALM
YC7-1 12 PTC output (AC + DC)
PTC REM PTC
YC7-2 11
2-1-23
2FB/2FC
5,
"
& 5)
! (0
(3
*
(,
5- 54
%
()
+
# (/
$ (2
' (1
(.
(4 (-
2-1-24
2FB/2FC
ESW
EPWB
SBESW
SB EJ SW SIG
YC12-10
FS SOL PUL
YC6-14 FSSOL
FS SOL RTN
YC6-16
FSSW
DUPPWB
FS SW
YC6-11 FM
EJECT SW
YC2-A11
FUSER MOT CLK
YC4-1
FUSER MOT ALM
YC2-B10
FUSER MOT REM
YC2-B11
DUP SDI
YC2-A2 YC2-A10
DUP SDO
YC2-A3 YC2-A9
DUP SCLK
YC2-A4 YC2-A8
DUP RDY
YC2-A5 YC2-A7
DUP SEL
YC2-A6 YC2-A6
2-1-25
2FB/2FC
(2 (/
(.
(1 (3
5- ! (0
(4
()
% (,
5, 52
5)
# '
54 +
(- 51
* & $ "
2-1-26
2FB/2FC
EPWB DUPPWB
DUP SCLK
YC2-A4 YC2-A8
DUP SDI
YC2-A2 YC2-A10
DUP SDO
YC2-A3 YC2-A9
DUP SEL
YC2-A6 YC2-A6
DUP RDY
YC2-A5 YC2-A7
DUP FEED SW
YC7-1
DUP CONV SW A
YC7-3
DUPSBSOL
DUPJSW
DUPFSW
DUPSRSW
DUPSRM
DUPCSW1
DUPCSW3
DUPCSW2
DUPSBM DUPFDM
DUPFSSOL
DUP CONV SW B
YC7-5
DUP CONV SW C
YC7-7
2-1-27
2FB/2FC
Page 3
2nd Page 5
3rd
Page 1
1st
4th
Page 7
• 4th sheet will be fed between 1st sheet and 2nd sheet.
• Back side of the first sheet, print page 2 → front side of the 4th sheet, print page 7 → back side of the 2nd sheet,
print page 4 → feed 5th sheet (print page 9).
• After that print front and back alternately.
Page 2
Page 7
Page 1 1st Page 4
4th
Page 3
2nd
Page 5
3rd
5th
Page 9
2-1-28
2FB/2FC
5/ 54
53 5. 52 51
50 5-
5,
64
6- (4
(. (/
5)
()
(2 (3 (0 (,
6) 6, + (-
61 (1
62
# 63
$
%
! "
' *
&
Figure 2-1-34 Document processor (DP) section
2-1-29
2FB/2FC
DPMPWB
LM_B, LM B
YC3-7, 3-8 LM A, LM _A
YC3-9, 3-10
INV REM
YC12-2
FM A, FM B
YC3-3, 3-4 FM _A, FM _B
YC3-5, 3-6
ODSW
YC7-2
RM A, RM _A
YC4-3, 4-4 RM B, RM _B
YC4-5, 4-6 OFM
REGSW OFSW
YC7-5
ORM DPLM
CM A, CM B OCM
YC4-9, 4-10 CM _A, CM_B
YC4-11, 4-12 DPINPWB
ORSW
DPTSW2 CIS
TMG2SW
YC7-11
TMG1SW
YC7-8
DPTSW1
EL
CCD
Scanner section
YC2
CISSHDPWB
SPWB
YC1 YC6
YC2 YC5
Image data
YC5
MPWB
2-1-30
2FB/2FC-2.0
(1) PWBs
6
7 9
10 13 11
12 8
1
2
18 17
15
16
14
20
19
1. Engine PWB (EPWB)................................... Controls the other PWBs, electrical components and optional devices.
2. Main PWB (MPWB) ..................................... Controls the image processing, operation panel and laser scanner unit.
3. AC power source PWB (ACPSPWB)........... Controls fuser heater M, S, and L. Distributes AC power source.
4. DC power source PWB (DCPSPWB) .......... Generates 24 V DC, 12 V DC, 8 V DC and 5 V DC.
5. Zener PWB (ZPWB)..................................... Controls the PTC (charging) voltage.
6. Operation PWB(OPWB)............................... Controls operation panel and LCD indication.
7. Scanner PWB (SPWB) ................................ Controls the scanner section.
8. SHD PWB (SHDPWB) ................................. Controls the shading correction and AGC of CCD.
9. CCD PWB (CCDPWB)................................. Reads the image of originals.
10. Inverter PWB (INPWB) ................................ Controls the exposure lamp.
2-2-1
2FB/2FC-2.0
11. High voltage PWB (HVPWB) ....................... Generates high voltage for main charging, PTC (charging), and develop-
ing bias.
12. APC PWB (APCPWB) ................................. Generates and controls the laser beam.
13. PD PWB (PDPWB) ...................................... Defects horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam.
14. Cassette PWB (CSPWB) ............................. Controls the electrical components (cassette 3 and 4 section).
15. Deck PWB (DKPWB) ................................... Controls the electrical components (cassette 1 and 2 section).
16. Duplex PWB (DUPPWB) ............................. Controls the electrical components (duplex section).
17. Drum heater PWB (DRHPWB) .................... Controls the drum heater temperature.
18. Transfer high voltage PWB (THVPWB) ....... Generates high voltage for transfer bias.
19. Sub DC power source PWB
(SDCPSPWB) .............................................. Generates 24 V DC for optional document finisher.
20. Fan motors drive PWB (FMDPWB) ............. Relays circuit between the engine PWB and each fan motor.
2-2-2
2FB/2FC
1 38 39 40
45 41
57
42
43
15
8 14
7 11
12
10 13
9
2
52 50 51
47
48 49 3
31 27 54
25
24
20 16 30 26
21 17
22 18 53
4
23 19 46
5
55
32
28
6
34
36 56
33
29
35
37
44
1. Main power switch (MSW) ........................... Turns the AC power on and off.
2. Feed switch 1 (FSW1) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed.
3. Feed switch 2 (FSW2) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed.
4. Feed switch 3 (FSW3) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed.
5. Feed switch 4 (FSW4) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed.
6. Feed switch 5 (FSW5) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed.
7. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed stop timing.
8. Exit switch (ESW) ........................................ Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section.
9. Feedshift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the feedshift section.
10. Switchback exit switch (SBESW)................. Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback eject section.
11. MP paper empty switch (MPPESW) ............ Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray.
12. MP paper length size switch (MPPLSW) ..... Detects the length of paper on the MP tray.
13. MP paper width size switch (MPPWSW) ..... Detects the width of paper on the MP tray.
14. MP tray switch (MPTSW) ............................. Detects the MP tray extension is extend.
2-2-3
2FB/2FC
15. Toner container sensor (TCS) ...................... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container.
16. Cassette 1 level sensor 1 (CAS1LS1) ......... Detects the paper level in cassette 1.
17. Cassette 1 level sensor 2 (CAS1LS2) ......... Detects the paper level in cassette 1.
18. Cassette 1 level sensor 3 (CAS1LS3) ......... Detects the paper level in cassette 1.
19. Cassette 1 detection sensor (CAS1DS)....... Detects the opening/closing of cassette 1.
20. Cassette 2 level sensor 1 (CAS2LS1) ......... Detects the paper level in cassette 2.
21. Cassette 2 level sensor 2 (CAS2LS2) ......... Detects the paper level in cassette 2.
22. Cassette 2 level sensor 3 (CAS2LS3) ......... Detects the paper level in cassette 2.
23. Cassette 2 detection sensor (CAS2DS)....... Detects the opening/closing of cassette 2.
24. Deck conveying switch 1 (DCSW1) ............. Detects a paper misfeed.
25. Deck conveying switch 2 (DCSW2) ............. Detects a paper misfeed.
26. Paper empty switch 1 (PESW1)................... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 1.
27. Paper empty switch 2 (PESW2)................... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 2.
28. Paper empty switch 3 (PESW3)................... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 3.
29. Paper empty switch 4 (PESW4)................... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 4.
30. Lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1)........................... Detects the cassette 1 deck base reaching the upper limit.
31. Lift limit switch 2 (LILSW2)........................... Detects the cassette 2 deck base reaching the upper limit.
32. Lift limit switch 3 (LILSW3)........................... Detects the cassette 3 cassette operation plate reaching the upper limit.
33. Lift limit switch 4 (LILSW4)........................... Detects the cassette 4 cassette operation plate reaching the upper limit.
34. Paper length size switch 1 (PLSW1)............ Detects the length of paper in cassette 3.
35. Paper length size switch 2 (PLSW2)............ Detects the length of paper in cassette 4.
36. Paper width size switch 1 (PWSW1)............ Detects the width of paper in cassette 3.
37. Paper width size switch 2 (PWSW2)............ Detects the width of paper in cassette 4.
38. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW)..... Detects the optical system in the home position.
39. Original size detection sensor (OSDS) ........ Detects the size of the original.
40. DP set detection switch (DPSDSW) ............ Detects the opening/closing of the DP.
41. Toner container detection switch
(TCDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner container.
42. Developing sensor (DEVS) .......................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
43. Potential sensor (PTS) ................................. Detects the potential on the drum surface.
44. Humidity sensor (HUMS1) ........................... Detects the outside temperature and humidity.
45. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ....................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.
46. Right cover switch (RCSW) ......................... Breaks the safety circuit when the right cover is opened.
47. Duplex conveying switch 1 (DUPCSW1) ..... Detects a paper misfeed.
48. Duplex conveying switch 2 (DUPCSW2) ..... Detects a paper misfeed.
49. Duplex conveying switch 3 (DUPCSW3) ..... Detects a paper misfeed.
50. Duplex side registration switch
(DUPSRSW) ................................................ Operates the right and left side guides.
51. Duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW)...... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex paper feed section.
52. Duplex feed switch (DUPFSW).................... Detects a paper misfeed.
53. Waste toner sensor (WTS)........................... Detects when the waste toner box is full.
54. Timing switch 1 (TIMSW1) ........................... Detects the cassette 2 paper feed timing.
55. Timing switch 2 (TIMSW2) ........................... Detects the cassette 3 paper feed timing.
56. Timing switch 3 (TIMSW3) ........................... Detects the cassette 4 paper feed timing.
57. Developing humidity sensor (HUMS2)......... Detects the temperature and humidity around the developing section.
2-2-4
2FB/2FC-2.0
(3) Motors
30
27 2
29
31
19 41 17
24 15
35
18
33
26
25
34 32
20
39
40 1
16 13
11 12
22
23 21 4
36
3
28
7
37 8
38 6
10 14
1. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the drum and cleaning unit.
2. Scanner motor (SM)..................................... Drives the optical system.
3. Paper feed motor 1 (PFM1) ......................... Drives cassette 1 paper feed.
4. Paper feed motor 2 (PFM2) ......................... Drives cassette 2 paper feed.
5. Paper feed motor 3 (PFM3) ......................... Drives cassette 3 paper feed.
6. Paper feed motor 4 (PFM4) ......................... Drives cassette 4 paper feed.
7. Lift motor 1 (LIM1)........................................ Operates the deck base in cassette 1 and detects the paper level
in cassette 1.
8. Lift motor 2 (LIM2)........................................ Operates the deck base in cassette 2 and detects the paper level
in cassette 2.
9. Lift motor 3 (LIM3)........................................ Operates the lift cassette lift plate.
10. Lift motor 4 (LIM4)........................................ Operates the lift cassette lift plate.
11. Registration motor (RM)............................... Drives the registration rollers.
12. Feed motor (FDM) ....................................... Drives the paper feed section.
13. MP feed motor (MPFDM)............................. Drives the MP tray paper feed section.
14. Vertical feed motor (VFDM) ......................... Drives the vertical conveying section.
2-2-5
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-2-6
2FB/2FC
(4) Others
17 2
3
5 9,10
6 19 18
8 13 1
20
7
4 12
21
11
15 14
16
2-2-7
2FB/2FC
3
2
4
1. DP main PWB (DPMPWB) .......................... Controls electrical components of the document processor.
2. DP inverter PWB (DPINPWB)...................... Controls the light source of built-in CIS.
3. LED PWB (LEDPWB) .................................. Indicates presence of originals on the document processor or an original
jam.
4. CIS SHD PWB (CISSHDPWB) .................... Controls the shading correction of CIS.
2-2-8
2FB/2FC
10 2 8
9
4 3
5
11
12
1
6 7
1. DP safety switch 1 (DPSSW1)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the document processor is opened; resets
original misfeed detection.
2. DP safety switch 2 (DPSSW2)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the document processor top cover is
opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. Original set switch (OSSW) ......................... Detects the presence of an original.
4. Original feed switch (OFSW) ....................... Detects primary original feed end timing.
5. Original registration switch (ORSW) ............ Detects the original conveying timing.
6. DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) ..................... Detects the original scanning timing.
7. DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) ..................... Detects the original scanning timing.
8. Original length size switch (OLSW) ............. Detects the length of the original.
9. Original width size switch (OWSW) ............. Detects the width of the original.
10. DP lift upper limit switch (DPLULSW) .......... Detects the lift table reaching the upper limit.
11. DP lift lower limit switch (DPLLLSW) ........... Detects the lift table reaching the lower limit.
12. CIS open/close switch (CISOCSW) ............. Detects the opening/closing of the document processor bottom cover.
2-2-9
2FB/2FC
2 4
5 1
1. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the DP original feed belt.
2. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying sections.
3. Original registration motor (ORM)................ Drives the registration roller.
4. DP lift motor (DPLIM) ................................... Operates the lift table.
5. DP fan motor (DPFM) .................................. Cools the CIS.
6. CIS (CIS)...................................................... Reads the image of originals.
2-2-10
2FB/2FC
ACPSPWB
Secondary Primary
DCPS 5VPD
PWB
DH REM Drawer
PC heater DH1
control DH2
circuit
DH3
FH-M REM Fuser
PC heater M
control FH-M
EPWB circuit
FH-L REM Fuser
PC heater L
control FH-L
circuit
FH-S REM Fuser
PC heater S
control FH-S
circuit
NEUTRAL IN
Noise
filter
circuit MSW
LIVE OUT LIVE IN
NEUTRAL OUT
SDCPSPWB
2-3-1
2FB/2FC
100V
1 5
3 1 7 1 2 1 2
YC1
1
YC5 YC3 YC2 YC6
TAB4 TAB5 TAB3
1 F003
YC4 F002
3
YC7
1
TAB1 F001
F007
F004
TAB2
F006
F005
200V
1 5
3 1 7 1 2 1 2
YC1
1
YC5 YC3 YC2 YC6
TAB4 TAB5 TAB3
1
YC4 F003 F002
3
YC7
1
TAB1 F001
F007
F004
TAB2 F006
F005
2-3-2
2FB/2FC
2-3-3
2FB/2FC-2.0
DCPSPWB
DH REM
FH-M REM
ACPSPWB FH-L REM
FH-S REM
5VPD EPWB
24V1PD
MPWB
EPWB RELAY SOURCE
DUPPWB
CSPWB 5VPD RELAY REM
DKPWB
SPWB Switching Relay
HDD regulator
circuit FMDPWB
Optional 5VPD
document finisher R24V1PD EPWB
Optional 5VPD
DUPPWB
side feeder
12VPD R24V2PD
HDD DKPWB
CSPWB
V1: 5V Relay
8VPD
SPWB V2: 5VPD
V3: 8VPD
V4: 12VPD
SGND V5: 24V1PD
V6: 24V2PD
PGND V7: 24V3PD 24V2PD Optional
side feeder
5V
24V3PD
MPWB SLEEP REM SPWB
24V3PD (24Vref)
SDCPSPWB
FAN H/L
PSFM LIVE IN
Full/half NEUTRAL IN ACPSPWB
speed
EPWB change
circuit
Zero cross
ZERO CROSS signal detection
circuit AC
input
2-3-4
2FB/2FC
100V
1 8 1 10
1 5
1
YC7
YC1 YC2
1 6
YC6 F2002 IC1003
YC10
10
F2004 PC1003
7 PC1002
F2003
YC3
1
1
2 1
3
T1001
YC4 YC8
IC2005
18 17
IC1001
2 1
YC5
T1002
16 15
4
YC11
1
2
YC9 IC1002
PC1007
PC1008
PC1004
PC1005
IC2007
IC1004
IC2008
200V
1 8 1 10
1 5
1
YC7
YC1 YC2
1 6
YC6 F2002 IC1003
YC10
10
F2004 PC1003
7 PC1002
F2003
YC3
1
1
2 1
3
T1001
YC4 YC8
IC2005
18 17
IC1001
2 1
YC5
T1002
16 15
4
YC11
1
2
YC9 IC1002
PC1007
PC1008
PC1004
PC1005
IC2007
IC1004
IC2008
2-3-5
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-6
2FB/2FC
2-3-7
2FB/2FC
MPWB
OPWB
*
RE, WE, CS, RESET
LCD CPUCLK
controller 33 MHz
Image data Optional
CODE Basis signal(CLK, MRE, VSYNC)
DIMM printer
CIS board
Image data Image data
Basis signal Pseudo BD signal Image
(CLK, MRE, HSYNC) MIP data
LVDS
Clock(ADCLK) Basis
SHD Horizontal scanning for signal
PWB VSYNC synchronizing signal CCD (WCK,
(CCDSH) WVST,
MREID)
D/A converter control signal for laser power adjust (DATA, CLK, LOAD)
2-3-8
2FB/2FC
5 1
B20
YC3
A1
YC17 B1 B34 B1 B30
B50 B1 A1 A34 A1 A30
A50 A1 YC4 YC5
1
YC18 U54 U52U56U55 U53 U57 U59 U60U61 U58 YC6
U25
U43
20
U21 U44
A20
8 B1
U22 U14 U46 U42
1
1
U13 X6
U25 YC21 U49 YC7
100
U19
X7 U63
1
X1 YC2
14
13
72
U1 U20
U31
A14
U2
B1
U10 U51 U62
U9
U23 U15 U45
U12 U17 YC13 YC8
U26 X3
B1
A1
U71 U28
U6 U64 U24
U33 U50
YC12
B14
U3
A1
U29 U35
1
U68 U11 U16
YC9 X8
X4
U72 U27
YC1
1
X2
1
U36 B20
A20
15
U32
22
YC10
U39 U40 U49
1
U70 U69 U34 YC16
1
X5
U37
12
1 40
U65 U41
YC14
50
1
YC26 YC19 YC11
U5 1 5 1 8 1
1 8
2
2-3-9
2FB/2FC
2-3-10
2FB/2FC
2-3-11
2FB/2FC
2-3-12
2FB/2FC
2-3-13
2FB/2FC
2-3-14
2FB/2FC
2-3-15
2FB/2FC
2-3-16
2FB/2FC-2.0
EPWB
Optional Serial CLK
document communication DEVC
DATA CLC
finisher/side
feeder
OUTPEN, PVSYNC
EG SCLK, EG SDO, EG SBSY, EG SDIR, EG IRN,
Switches EG SDI
Sensor
DKPWB REM Address bus
SIG Flash
Motors ROM
Solenoid Data/Address multiplex bus
(U305)
Address
Address bus
Switches latch MPWB
Sensor (U303, U304)
CPU SRAM
CSPWB REM (U101) (U306)
SIG CLK
Motors DIO EEPROM
(U308)
SRAM
(U307)
Switches
DUPPWB REM
SIG SEL
Motors APCPWB
Solenoids
DATA, CLK, LOAD
Buffer
FH-M
Switches SIG XIO (U202) DATA, CLK, LOAD D/A HVPWB
FH-S (U201) con- THVPWB
Sensors verter
FH-L
(U901)
REM
ZERO CROSS SIG Switches
AC DC Sensors
PSPWB PSPWB 5 V DC
24 V DC Motors
REM
Solenoids
Motors Fan motors
REM
Solenoids
fan motors 24V, PLGREM, PLGCLK PM
PLGRDY
REM
Fan
FMDPWB REM
motors
2-3-17
2FB/2FC
A10 A1
1 7 1 15
B10 B1 U307 U306
YC19 YC1
YC21
1
YC13
U402 U403
U1107
1
1
U303
YC18
YC8
U1101 U304
U305 U202 U1105
1 12
2
4
1
U1102
1
YC10
YC17
U1108
U1104 X1
5
YC12
1
U1103
6
YC23
U101
1
U1106 U201
11
YC22
4
U308
U502
1
4
U903
YC4
1
1
U501
11
U902 U801
1 9
YC7
A1 A13 A1 A11
U802
YC9
1 16
U904
YC6
12
B13 YC3 B1 B11 YC2 B1
5
1 12 1 32
1 15 1 14 U701 1 5
YC15 YC14 YC20 YC16 YC5
2-3-18
2FB/2FC
2-3-19
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-20
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-21
2FB/2FC
2-3-22
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-23
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-24
2FB/2FC
SPWB
P24V, A24V
DP SEL, DP SDI, DP SCLK
DCPSPWB S5V
8V DP END, DP TMG, DP RDY, DP SDO DP
Data bus
SC SCLK SRAM
Address Address bus (U10)
SC SDI latch
SC SDO CPU (U11, U12)
MPWB SC SBSY (U1)
SC SDIR
EESCLK
SC IRN EEPROM
EESDA (U9)
ORGSW OSDS
IS RESETN DPSW DPSDSW
IS PLLSEL1 HPSW SHPSW
IS PLLSEL0
IS DIVSEL
IS PLLSYNC
SFANON LFM
PAGEST
SFM
OVMON
IS RDY
SHDPWB IS SEL SMOTCLK, SMOTCWB, Motor
IS SDO MTOFF, SMOTVREF driver SM
IS SDI (U15)
IS SCLK
IS SELAFE
IS SDOAFE SLAMPON
INPWB
IS SDIAFE
IS SCLKAFE RESET RESET IC
(U4)
EL
7 1 6 1
YC1 U12
YC9
6
U11
YC10
U15 U4
YC4
U16 X1
U14
1
U1 U3 U2
5 1
1 5
U10
U13 U9
YC2
YC8 U7
U5 U6 U8
1
2-3-25
2FB/2FC
2-3-26
2FB/2FC
2-3-27
2FB/2FC
2-3-28
2FB/2FC
CCDPWB
SHDPWB
Transistors OS1
A[9:0] Buffer CCDA[9:0]
CCD (Q5, Q7)
AFE (U6)
sensor
(U3) Front
(U5)
CLK, SDI, SEN
Transistors OS2
(Q1, Q2) SDO ISSCLKAFE
ISSDIAFE
Buffer ISSDOAFE SPWB
(U9)
ISSELAFE
CLK, SDI, SEN
Transistors OS3 SDO
(Q6, Q8)
AFE
Back
(U7)
C[9:0] Buffer CCDC[9:0]
Transistors OS4 (U8)
(Q3, Q4)
U5 U7
U3
U2
U8 U6
U4 U1 U9
2-3-29
2FB/2FC
2-3-30
2FB/2FC
2-3-31
2FB/2FC-2.0
DKPWB
LCF SW A, B
R24V PE SW1, 2
DCSW1, 2
DCPSPWB R5V LIM SW1,2
PESW1, 2
LCF SW A1
LILSW1, 2
Reset IC RESET TIMSW1
(U8) Motor PF MOT1
drivers PF MOT2 PFM1, 2
(U10, U11)
LIFT MOT1 Motor
LIM1, 2 LIFT MOT2 drivers Motor
(U14, U18) driver TONER MOT
TM
CPU (U17)
(U6)
CAS1LS1, 2, 3 LCF1 SW1, 2, 3, 4 MAIN MOT CLK
CAS1DS MAIN MOT REM
CAS2LS1, 2, 3 LCF2 SW1, 2, 3, 4 DM
MAIN MOT ALM
CAS2DS
FEED B SW
FSW2
MP PE SW
MPPESW
MPPLSW MP PSD SW Motor
MPPWSW MP DIG 0, 1, 2 driver MP MOT
MPFDM
MPTSW MP TRY SW (U15)
MPSOL MP SOL
CONT SENS TCS
CONTENA SET TCDSW
DK SCLK
DK SDO
DK RDY
DK SEL
DK SDI
EPWB
2-3-32
2FB/2FC
1
U11 U15
YC8
14
10
B9
A1
YC6
YC5
U10 U17
1
B1
A9
3
YC4
U12
1
YC3
U14
B12
A1
14
7
YC7
YC9
U6
U7
B1
A12
1
B13
A1
U4
9
X1
YC11
U5
YC2
U16
1
U18
B1
A13
YC1
YC10
4 1
15 1
2-3-33
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-34
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-3-35
2FB/2FC
2-3-36
2FB/2FC
CSPWB
R24V
PE SW3, 4
DCPSPWB R5V
LMT SW3, 4 PESW3, 4
FEED SW D1, E1 LILSW3, 4
Reset IC RESET
TIMSW2, 3
(U4)
Motor PF MOT3 PFM3, 4
drivers PF MOT4
LIFT MOT3 Motor (U6, U7)
LIFT MOT4 drivers CPU
(U8, U13) (U2)
LIM3, 4
LIFT3 ESW1, 2 Motor
LIFT4 ESW1, 2 driver VF MOT VFDM
(U12)
PSD SW3, 4
PLSW1, 2 CS3 DIG0, 1, 2 TFR MOT CLK
PWSW1, 2
CS4 DIG0, 1, 2 TFR MOT REM TRM
FSW3, 4, 5
FSW C, D, E TFR MOT ALM
CS PAUSE
CS SCLK
CS SDO
CS RDY
CS SEL
CS SDI
EPWB
B12 B1
14 1 26 1
YC2 YC4
A1 YC5 A12
14 1
YC6
U13
1
YC3
U8
4
7
U6 U7
YC1
U11
1
1
YC7
X1 U12
U1
U2
7
U14 U3 U5 U9
2-3-37
2FB/2FC
2-3-38
2FB/2FC
2-3-39
2FB/2FC
DUPPWB
R24V DLP MOT CLK
DCPSPWB R5V DLP MOT REM
DEVM
DLP MOT ALM
Reset IC RESET
(U7)
Motor
driver DUP SIDE MOT DUPSRM
DUP SB SOL ATC
(U8)
DUPSBSOL DUP SB SOL PUL
Motor
CPU driver DUP FEED MOT DUPFDM
DUP FS SOL ATC
DUPFSSOL (U6) (U9)
DUP FS SOL PUL
Motor
driver DUP SB MOT
DUP CONV SW A, B, C DUPSBM
DUPCSW1, 2, 3 (U12)
DUPSRSW DUP SIDE REG SW
DUPJSW DUP JAM SW FUSER MOT CLK
DUPFSW DUP FEED SW FUSER MOT REM
FM
FUSER MOT ALM
FS SW
FSSW Motor
driver REG MOT
RM
(U10)
RSW REG SW
DUP PAUSE
DUP RDY
ESW driver
DUP SDI
FDM
(U11)
EPWB
2-3-40
2FB/2FC
22 2 24 2
4 1 21 1
12 1 23 1
YC7 YC5
YC1 YC6
5 1
YC8
U10
U4 U3 U5
U8
U11
1
U12
YC4
U6
U7 U9
9
U13 YC2
X1 A1 A11
7 1 B11 B1
YC3
2-3-41
2FB/2FC
2-3-42
2FB/2FC
2-3-43
2FB/2FC
2-3-44
2FB/2FC
A B
OPWB
OPWB
2-3-45
2FB/2FC
SW19 CN3
SW20 L1 L2
SW21
Q2
Q1 SW22
SW1 SW5 SW9 SW9
T1
L4
SW2 SW6 SW10 Q4
CN6 SW16
Q3
L5
SW14
SW3 SW7 SW11
SW17
L3
L6
SW4 SW8 SW12
SW18
SW15
K24 L13
L8
K25 L14
L9
CN5
K26 L15
L10
CN4
K27 L16
L11
2-3-46
2FB/2FC
2-3-47
2FB/2FC
2-3-48
2FB/2FC
RGDATA
TMG1SW
LST
RGCLK
Image data
DPTSW1
RGLD TMG2SW
DPTSW2
RGRDWR FDSW OFSW
RGOUT REGSW
ORSW
+A24V LHSW
DPLULSW
+5V LLSW
DPLLLSW
SETSW
OSSW
Reset IC ORGLSW OLSW
ORGW OWSW
12V
6V
EEPROM W1SW
W2SW
X'tal CISOPN
CIS CISOCSW
COVOPN
DPSSW2
Exposure lamp DPOPN
DPSSW1
FMA, A-, B, B-
OFM
RMA, A-, B, B-
ORM
+24V CMA, A-, B, B- OCM
DPINPWB INVREM LMA, A-, B, B-
DPLIM
LEDG, LEDR
LEDPWB
FANREM
DPFM
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
YC13
YC8
YC9
YC6
23
24
3 1
YC7
U5
10
U9
5
4
YC5
5
6
YC2
YC3
10
9
12
11
U4
U7
1
1
12
1
U3
21
22
U8
YC11
X1
YC4
YC1
U1
6 1
3
U2
2
YC12
7
U6
YC15
YC14
U10
1
1 5
1
YC10
Figure 2-3-22 DP main PWB silk-screen diagram
2-3-49
2FB/2FC
2-3-50
2FB/2FC
2-3-51
2FB/2FC
2-3-52
2-4 Appendixes
Adjusting the magnifica- Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 POLYGON U053 test 1-4-16
tion in the main scan- MOTOR pattern
2 ning direction (printing
adjustment)
Adjusting the magnifica- Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN MOTOR U053 test 1-4-16
tion in the auxiliary pattern
3 scanning direction
(printing adjustment)
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSUOUT U034 test 1-6-27 To make an adjustment for
(printing adjustment) pattern duplex copying, select LSUOUT
4 (DUP).
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the position of cassette 1 U034 LSUOUT U034 test 1-6-15 Adjusts the position of each
of the cassettes (print- or 2 pattern paper source.
5 ing adjustment)
Adjusting the leading Registration motor turning on tim- U034 RCL ON L U034 test 1-6-25 To make an adjustment for
edge registration (print- ing (secondary paper feed start RCL ON S pattern duplex copying, select RCL ON
6 ing adjustment) timing) (DUP) L/RCL ON (DUP) S.
Adjusting the leading LSU illumination start timing U402 LEAD U402 test 1-6-28
edge margin (printing pattern
7 adjustment)
2FB/2FC-3
2-4-1
Adjus Maintenance mode
ting Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
2-4-2
Item No. Mode
order
2FB/2FC-3
Adjusting the trailing LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test 1-6-28 To make an adjustment for
edge margin (printing pattern duplex copying, select TRAIL
8 adjustment) (DUP).
Adjusting the left and LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A/C U402 test 1-6-28
right margins (printing pattern
9 adjustment)
Adjusting the lateral Adjusting the position of the ISU Test chart 1-6-50
squareness (scanning (scanning adjustment)
10 adjustment)
Adjusting magnification Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN Test chart 1-6-51 U065: For copying an original
of the scanner in the ADJ placed on the contact glass.
11 main scanning direction U070 CIS MAIN ADJ U070: For copying originals from
(scanning adjustment) the document processor (to make
an adjustment for CIS).
Adjusting magnification Original scanning speed U065 SUB SCAN ADJ Test chart 1-6-52 U065: For copying an original
of the scanner in the U070 CONVEY 1-6-91 placed on the contact glass.
auxiliary scanning direc- SPEED U070: For copying originals from
12
tion (scanning adjust- the document processor.
ment) To make an adjustment for CIS,
select CIS SUB ADJ.
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data U067 ADJUST DATA Test chart 1-6-53 U067: For copying an original
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) U072 ADJUST DATA 1-6-92 placed on the contact glass.
U072: For copying originals from
the document processor.
13
To make an adjustment for CIS,
select ADJUST DATA2.
To make an adjustment for rotate
copying, select ADJUST DATA3.
Adjus Maintenance mode
ting Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
Item No. Mode
order
Adjusting the leading Original scan start timing U066 ADJUST DATA Test chart 1-6-54 U066: For copying an original
edge registration (scan- U071 ADJUST DATA1 1-6-93 placed on the contact glass.
ning adjustment) U071: For copying originals from
the document processor.
14
To make an adjustment for CIS,
select ADJUST DATA3.
To make an adjustment for rotate
copying, select ADJUST DATA5.
Adjusting the leading Adjusting the original scan data U403 B MARGIN Test chart 1-6-55 U403: For copying an original
edge margin (scanning (image adjustment) U404 B MARGIN 1-6-95 placed on the contact glass.
adjustment) U404: For copying originals from
15
the document processor.
To make an adjustment for CIS,
select B MARGIN (BACK).
Adjusting the trailing Adjusting the original scan data U403 D MARGIN Test chart 1-6-55 U403: For copying an original
edge margin (scanning (image adjustment) U404 D MARGIN 1-6-95 placed on the contact glass.
adjustment) U404: For copying originals from
16
the document processor.
To make an adjustment for CIS,
select D MARGIN (BACK).
Adjusting the left and Adjusting the original scan data U403 A MARGIN/ Test chart 1-6-55 U403: For copying an original
right margins (scanning (image adjustment) C MARGIN 1-6-95 placed on the contact glass.
adjustment) U404 A MARGIN/ U404: For copying originals from
17 C MARGIN the document processor.
To make an adjustment for CIS,
select A MARGIN (BACK)/C
MARGIN (BACK).
When maintenance item U092 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2AC68241), the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Adjusting the scanner magnification in the main scanning direction (U065)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (U065)
When maintenance item U076 (Executing DP automatic adjustment) is run using the specified original (P/N 2AC68241), the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
2FB/2FC-3
2-4-3
2FB/2FC
Image quality
Item Specifications
100% magnification Copier: ±0.8%
Using DP: ±1.5%
Enlargement/reduction Copier: ±1.0%
Using DP: ±1.5%
Lateral squareness (copier mode) Copier: ±1.5 mm/375 mm
Using DP: ±2.5 mm/375 mm
Lateral squareness (printer mode) ±1.0 mm/375 mm
Margins (copier mode) A: 3.0±2.0 mm
B: 3.0± 2.5 mm
C: 3.0±2.0 mm
D: 3.0 ±2.5mm
Margins (printer mode) A: 5.0 mm
B: 5.0 mm
C: 5.0 mm
D: 5.5 mm
Leading edge registration Cassette: ±2.5 mm
MP tray: ±2.5 mm
Duplex copying: ±2.5 mm
Using DP: ±3.0 mm
Skewed paper feed Cassette: 1.5 mm or less
(left-right difference) MP tray: 1.5 mm or less
Duplex copying: 2.0 mm or less
Using DP:
Simplex-Simplex: 2.0 mm or less
Simplex-Duplex: 2.5 mm or less
Duplex-Simplex: 2.5 mm or less
Duplex-Duplex: 3.0 mm or less
Lateral image shifting Cassette: ±2.0 mm or less
MP tray: ±2.0 mm or less
Duplex copying: ±3.0 mm or less
Using DP:
Simplex-Simplex: 2.5 mm or less
Simplex-Duplex: 3.5 mm or less
Duplex-Simplex: 3.0 mm or less
Duplex-Duplex: 3.5 mm or less
Curling Simplex copying: 10.0 mm or less
Duplex copying: 10.0 mm or less
2-4-4
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-4-5
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-4-6
2FB/2FC-2.0
MP paper feed pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-6-19
Check and cloth. Replace after feeding
replace 250,000 sheets.
MP forwarding pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-6-19
Check and cloth. Replace after feeding
replace 250,000 sheets.
MP separation pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry P.1-6-19
Check and cloth. Replace after feeding
replace 250,000 sheets.
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Main charg- Main charger unit Clean Every service Clean the shield with a wet P.1-6-31
ing section Check and cloth and then a dry cloth.
replace
Main charger wire Replace Every service P.1-6-32
cleaning pad
Main charger wire Replace Every service P.1-6-33
Main charger grid Clean Every service Clean the shield with a wet P.1-6-32
Check and cloth and then a dry cloth.
replace Replace if the grid is damaged
or bending.
2-4-7
2FB/2FC-2.0
Contact glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Mirror 1 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Original size Clean Every service Clean the sensor emitter and
detection sensor sensor receiver with alcohol
or a dry cloth only if there is a
problem.
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Drum section Drum Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth. P.1-6-56
Check and Replace if the scratches on
replace the drum.
Potential sensor Clean Every service Air blow (do not vacuum).
Drum heater electrode Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth. P.1-6-59
Check and Replace if the resistance
replace between the disk and elec-
trode is 10 Ω or more.
2-4-8
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Developing Developing unit Replace Every service P.1-6-60
section
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Transfer Transfer belt Replace Every service P.1-6-63
section Transfer roller Replace Every service P.1-6-65
Idle belt roller Clean Every service Clean with a wet cloth and
then a dry cloth.
Transfer belt roller Clean Every service Clean with a wet cloth and
then a dry cloth.
Transfer ground roller Clean Every service Clean with a wet cloth and
then a dry cloth.
Check the continuity
between roller and ground
screw.
Transfer rear guide film Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Transfer rear brush Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Cleaning Cleaning unit Replace Every service P.1-6-66
section Cleaning lamp Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Charge eras- PTC unit Clean Every service Clean the shield with a wet P.1-6-68
ing section Check and cloth and then a dry cloth.
replace
2-4-9
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-4-10
2FB/2FC-2.0
2-4-11
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Other Waste toner box Replace Every service P.1-6-96
Developing rear fan Replace Every service P.1-6-97
filter
Developing front fan Replace Every service P.1-6-97
filter 1
Developing front fan Replace Every service P.1-6-97
filter 2
Image formation fan Replace Every service P.1-6-98
filter
Front cover filter 1 Replace Every service P.1-6-99
Front cover filter 2 Replace Every service P.1-6-99
Front cover filter 3 Replace Every service P.1-6-99
Ozone filter 1 Replace Every service P.1-6-100
Ozone filter 2 Replace Every service P.1-6-100
Ozone filter 3 Replace Every service P.1-6-100
Image quality Check and Every service
adjust
2-4-12
2FB/2FC-2.0
Maintenance kits
Maintenance kit part name Altemative
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name Part No.
Maintenance kit A
<For 120 V specifications> MK-650A(A) 1702FB7US0 072FB7US
PTC unit PTC ASS'Y
Main charger unit MCH ASS'Y
Transfer belt unit TC BELT ASS'Y
Fuser unit FUSER ASS'Y 120
Paper feed pulley unit UPPER PULLEY FEED ASS'Y
Heat roller separation craw unit HEAT CLAW ASS'Y
<For 220-240 V specifications> MK-650A(E) 1702FB8NL0 072FB8NL
PTC unit PTC ASS'Y
Main charger unit MCH ASS'Y
Transfer belt unit TC BELT ASS'Y
Fuser unit FUSER ASS'Y 240
Paper feed pulley unit UPPER PULLEY FEED ASS'Y
Heat roller separation craw unit HEAT CLAW ASS'Y
Maintenance kit B MK-650B 1702FB0UN0 072FB0UN
Waste toner box DISPOSAL TANK ASS'Y
Separation pulley LOWER PULLEY FEED
Cleaning unit CLEANING ASS'Y
Cleaning unit protect cover COVER CLN PROTECTION
Front cover filter 1 FILTER FRONT COVER D
Front cover filter 2 FILTER FRONT COVER E
Front cover filter 3 FILTER FRONT COVER F
Developing unit DEVELOPING ASS'Y (SP)
Developing rear fan filter REAR DLP FILTER ASS'Y*1
REAR DLP FILTER B ASS'Y*2
Drum heater electrode
PARTS,DRUM ELECTRODE ASS'Y
DP original feed belt
BELT PF
DP forwarding pulley
PULLEY LF
DP separation roller
PULLEY SEPARATION
Ozone filter 1
OZONE FILTER B
Ozone filter 2
OZONE FILTER C
Ozone filter 3
OZONE FILTER
Image formation fan filter
FILTER MC FAN
Developing front fan filter 1
FRONT FILTER DLP FAN
Developing front fan filter 2
FRONT FILTER IMAGE FAN
*1: 120 V specifications only (for the machine produced in before June, 2005).
*2: For the machine produced in July, 2005 and after.
2-4-13
2FB/2FC-2.0
Parts kits
Parts kit part name Altemative
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name Part No.
Parts kit A PM-650A 1702FB0U10 072FB0U1
Cleaning felt FELT,CLEANING
Heat roller separation claw SEPARATOR FUSER ASSY
Forwarding pulley PULLEY LEADING FEED
Paper feed pulley PULLEY FEED
Transfer roller ROLLER TRANSFER
Press roller ROLLER PRESSURE
Heat roller gear GEAR 50 HEAT ROLLER B
Heat roller ROLLER HEAT
Lower cleaning roller LOWER ROLLER CLEANING
Fuser joint gear GEAR FUSER JOINT B
Main charger grid GRID ASS'Y
Main charger cleaning pad MC CLEANING PAD ASS'Y
PTC cleaning pad PTC CLEANING PAD ASS'Y
Transfer belt PARTS TC BELT SP
Waste toner box DISPOSAL TANK ASS'Y
Separation pulley LOWER PULLEY FEED
Cleaning unit CLEANING ASS'Y
Cleaning unit protect cover COVER CLN PROTECTION
Front cover filter 1 FILTER FRONT COVER D
Front cover filter 2 FILTER FRONT COVER E
Front cover filter 3 FILTER FRONT COVER F
Developing unit DEVELOPING ASS'Y (SP)
Developing rear fan filter REAR DLP FILTER ASS'Y*1
REAR DLP FILTER B ASS'Y*2
Drum heater electrode
PARTS,DRUM ELECTRODE ASS'Y
DP original feed belt
BELT PF
DP forwarding pulley
PULLEY LF
DP separation roller
PULLEY SEPARATION
Ozone filter 1
OZONE FILTER B
Ozone filter 2
OZONE FILTER C
Ozone filter 3
OZONE FILTER
Image formation fan filter
FILTER MC FAN
Developing front fan filter 1
FRONT FILTER DLP FAN
Developing front fan filter 2
FRONT FILTER IMAGE FAN
Parts kit B PM-650B 1702FB0U20 072FB0U2
Cleaning felt FELT,CLEANING
Heat roller separation claw SEPARATOR FUSER ASSY
Forwarding pulley PULLEY LEADING FEED
Paper feed pulley PULLEY FEED
Transfer roller ROLLER TRANSFER
Press roller ROLLER PRESSURE
Heat roller gear GEAR 50 HEAT ROLLER B
Heat roller ROLLER HEAT
Lower cleaning roller LOWER ROLLER CLEANING
Fuser joint gear GEAR FUSER JOINT B
Main charger grid GRID ASS'Y
Main charger cleaning pad MC CLEANING PAD ASS'Y
PTC cleaning pad PTC CLEANING PAD ASS'Y
Transfer belt PARTS TC BELT SP
*1: 120 V specifications only (for the machine produced in before June, 2005).
*2: For the machine produced in July, 2005 and after.
2-4-14
2FB/2FC-2.0
A B C D E F G H I J
DCPSPWB
FINISHER S5V YC3-6 3 3 3
1 2 2 2 Finisher 1
1 1 YC11-1 S12V HDD
2 2 YC11-2 SGND HDD 1 1 1
HDD Power 3 3 YC11-3 SGND HDD
4 4 YC11-4 5V HDD
1 1
ACPSPWB YC7
3 FMDPWB 2 2
AC NEUTRAL OUT 3 3
3
N.C 2 2
AC LIVE OUT 1 1
3
2
1 YC2-10 24V ENGINE
7
1 1 6
YC3
EPWB 2 2 5 YC2-2 PGND ENGINE
CS HEATER1 LIVE 1 1 1 1
3 3 YC3-4 R24V ENGINE
CS HEATER1 NEUTRAL 5 5 2 2 DH1
YC9 4 4 YC3-1 S5V ENGINE
RESERVE SGND YC4-9 4 4
5 5 YC2-1 SGND ENGINE 1 1
RESERVE SGND YC4-10 CS HEATER2 LIVE 2 2
RESERVE SGND YC4-11 CS HEATER2 NEUTRAL 6 6 2 2 DH2
1 9 YC6-1 SOU RELAY RESERVE 5V YC5-8
4 2
3
8
7
YC6-2
YC6-3
REM
SIG
RELAY
ZEROCROSS
RESERVE
RESERVE
5V
5V
YC5-9 CS HEATER3 LIVE
CS HEATER3 NEUTRAL
3
7
3
7
1
2
1
2 DH3 4
YC5-10
REM CS HEATER
EPWB 4
5
6
5
YC6-6
YC6-7 REM HEATER1
RESERVE
RESERVE
S5V
5V
YC5-13
YC10-1
YC11 6 4 YC6-8 REM HEATER2 RESERVE 5V YC10-2
7 3 YC6-9 REM SUB HEATER RESERVE SGND YC10-3
9 1 YC6-5 REM PS FAN H/L RESERVE SGND YC10-4
8 2 YC4-16 RESERVE 24V YC10-5
RESERVE PGND YC10-6 NEUTEAL OUT TAB 4
NEUTEAL IN TAB 5
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-15
2FB/2FC
A B C D E F G H I J
EPWB
B32 NC SGND A6 A9 17 17 7 EGIRN 10 6 10 6 EG IRN
B33 NC ADJUSTB A7 A8 14 14 12 OUTPEN 9 7 9 7 OUTPEN
B34 NC SGND A8 A7 PVSYNC 8 8 8 8 PVSYNC
WINCD_DIN_RP3 A30 A30 A1 A1 WINCD_DIN_RP3 ADJUSTC A9 A6 10 10 16 LSU_5V 7 9 7 9 R5V
WINCD_DIN_RN3 A29 A29 WINCD_DIN_RN3 SGND A10 A5 SGND 6 10 6 10 SGND
WINCD_DIN_RP2 A28 A28
A2
A3
A2
A3 WINCD_DIN_RP2 CLK A11 A4 22 22 4 APC SGND
LDON
5
4
11
12
5
4
11
12
SGND
LDON
WINCD_DIN_RN2 A27 A27 A4 A4 WINCD_DIN_RN2 SGND A12 A3 13 13 11
PWB EG_LOAD 3 13 3 13 LSU-LOAD
LSU
WINCD_DIN_RP1 A26 A26 A5 A5 WINCD_DIN_RP1 DATA A13 A2 19 19 5
WINCD_DIN_RN1 A25 A25 A6 A6 WINCD_DIN_RN1 SGND A14 A1 9 9 15 YC11 EG_CLK 2 14 2 14 LSU -CLK
WINCD_DIN_RP0 A24 A24 WINCD_DIN_RP0 LOAD B14 B1 21 21 3 RESET EG_DATA 1 15 1 15 LSU-DATA
A7 A7 1 1 1 1
WINCD_DIN_RN0 A23 A23 A8 A8 WINCD_DIN_RN0 SGND B13 B2 2 2 2 2 SGND
WINCD_DIN_GP3 A22 A22 A9 A9 WINCD_DIN_GP3 VD1P B12 B3 15 15 9 3 3 3 3 DD7
WINCD_DIN_GN3 A21 A21 A10 A10 WINCD_DIN_GN3 VD1N B11 B4 16 16 10 4 4 4 4 DD8 YC2 YC5
WINCD_DIN_GP2 A20 A20 A11 A11 WINCD_DIN_GP2 VD2P B10 B5 11 11 13 5 5 5 5 DD6 SCANER_SET 8 1 8 1 SCANNER SET
WINCD_DIN_GN2 A19 A19 A12 A12 WINCD_DIN_GN2 VD2N B9 B6 12 12 14 6 6 6 6 DD9 SGND 7 2 7 2 SGND
SPWB
WINCD_DIN_GP1 A18 A18 A13 A13 WINCD_DIN_GP1 VD3P B8 B7 7 7 17 7 7 7 7 DD5 SCIRN 6 3 6 3 SC IRN
WINCD_DIN_GN1 VD3N 18 DD10 5 4 5 4 SC SDIR
2 WINCD_DIN_GP0
A17
A16
A17
A16
A14
A15
A14
A15
WINCD_DIN_GN1
WINCD_DIN_GP0 R5V
B7
B6
B8
B9
8
6
8
6 1
8
9
8
9
8
9
8
9 DD4
SCSDIR
SCSBSY 4 5 4 5 SC SBSY 2
WINCD_DIN_GN0 A15 A15 A16 A16 WINCD_DIN_GN0 SGND B5 B10 5 5 2 10 10 10 10 DD11 SCSO 3 6 3 6 SC SDO
SGND A14 A14 A17 A17 SGND BD+ B4 B11 4 4 3 PD 11 11 11 11 DD3 SCSI 2 7 2 7 SC SDI
SGND
SGND
A13
A12
A13
A12
A18
A19
A18
A19
SGND
SGND
BD-
BD_b
B3
B2
B12
B13
3
2
3
2
4
5 PWB 12
13
12
13
12
13
12
13
DD12
DD2
SCSCKN 1 8 1 8 SC SCLK
HDD
SGND A6 A6 A25 A25 SGND 5V 1 1 YC5-1 19 19 19 19 SGND DIG LED_4 3 3 11 3 11 11 DIG LED_4
SGND A5 A5 A26 A26 SGND 5V 2 2 YC5-2 20 20 20 20 NC DIG LED_3 4 4 10 4 10 10 DIG LED_3
SGND A4 A4 A27 A27 SGND 5V 3 3 YC5-3 21 21 21 21 DMARQ DIG LED_2 5 5 9 5 9 9 DIG LED_2
SGND A3 A3 A28 A28 SGND 5V 4 4 YC5-4 22 22 22 22 SGND DIG LED_1 6 6 8 6 8 8 DIG LED_1
WINCDVSY A2 A2 A29 A29 WINCDVSY 5V 5 5 YC5-5 23 23 23 23 -DIOW SCAN_4 7 7 7 7 7 7 SCAN_4
SGND A1 A1 A30 A30 SGND 5V 6 6 YC5-6 24 24 24 24 SGND SCAN_3 8 8 6 8 6 6 SCAN_3
WINCD_DIN_RP7 B30 B30 B1 B1 WINCD_DIN_RP7 SGND 7 7 YC4-1 25 25 25 25 -DIOR SCAN_2 9 9 5 9 5 5 SCAN_2
3 3
DCPSPWB
WINCD_DIN_RN7 B29 B29 B2 B2 WINCD_DIN_RN7 SGND 8 8 YC4-2 26 26 26 26 SGND SCAN_1 10 10 4 10 4 4 SCAN_1
WINCD_DIN_RP6 B28 B28 B3 B3 WINCD_DIN_RP6 SGND 9 9 YC4-3 27 27 27 27 IORADY DIG KEY_3 11 11 3 11 3 3 DIG KEY_3
WINCD_DIN_RN6 B27 B27 B4 B4 WINCD_DIN_RN6 SGND 10 10 YC4-4 28 28 28 28 CSEL(SGND) DIG KEY_2 12 12 2 12 2 2 DIG KEY_2
WINCD_DIN_RP5 B26 B26 B5 B5 WINCD_DIN_RP5 SGND 11 11 YC4-5 29 29 29 29 -DMACLK DIG KEY_1 13 13 1 13 1 1 DIG KEY_1
WINCD_DIN_RN5 B25 B25 B6 B6 WINCD_DIN_RN5 SGND 12 12 YC4-6 30 30 30 30 SGND
WINCD_DIN_RP4 B24 B24 B7 B7 WINCD_DIN_RP4 SGND 13 13 YC4-7 31 31 31 31 INTRQ YC6 CN2
WINCD_DIN_RN4 B23 B23 B8 B8 WINCD_DIN_RN4 SGND 14 14 YC4-8 32 32 32 32 NC BUZZER A1 A1 5 1 17 17 BUZZER
WINCD_DIN_GP7 B22 B22 B9 B9 WINCD_DIN_GP7 5VPD 15 15 YC5-11 33 33 33 33 DA1 X1 A2 A2 4 2 16 16 X1
WINCD_DIN_GN7 B21 B21 B10 B10 WINCD_DIN_GN7 5VPD 16 16 YC5-12 34 34 34 34 -PDIAG Y1 A3 A3 3 3 15 15 Y1
WINCD_DIN_GP6 B20 B20 B11 B11 WINCD_DIN_GP6 SLEEP 17 17 YC6-4 35 35 35 35 DA0 X2 A4 A4 2 4 14 14 X2
WINCD_DIN_GN6 B19 B19 B12 B12 WINCD_DIN_GN6 18 18 YC5-7 36 36 36 36 DA2 Y2 A5 A5 1 5 13 13 Y2
WINCD_DIN_GP5 B18 B18 B13 B13 WINCD_DIN_GP5 PGND 19 19 YC4-18 37 37 37 37 -CS0
WINCD_DIN_GN5 B17 B17 B14 B14 WINCD_DIN_GN5 _FOOT_SW 20 20 YC4-12 38 38 38 38 -CS1
WINCD_DIN_GP4 B16 B16 B15 B15 WINCD_DIN_GP4 24V 21 21 YC4-17 39 39 39 39 NC A20 A1
WINCD_DIN_GN4 B15 B15 B16 B16 WINCD_DIN_GN4 SLEEP 22 22 40 40 40 40 SGND A19 A2
SGND B14 B14 B17 B17 SGND A18 A3
SGND B13 B13 B18 B18 SGND A17 A4
4 SGND B12 B12 B19 B19 SGND 1 1 A16 A5 4
B11 B11 2 2 Foot SW 12 12
OPWB
SGND B20 B20 SGND LCD FRAM A6 A6 A15 A6 LCD FRAM
SGND B10 B10 B21 B21 SGND LCD LOAD A7 A7 A14 A7 11 11 LCD LOAD
SGND B9 B9 B22 B22 SGND LCD CP A8 A8 A13 A8 10 10 LCD CP
SGND B8 B8 B23 B23 SGND FG LCD VSS1 A9 A9 A12 A9 9 9 LCD VSS1
SGND B7 B7 B24 B24 SGND LCD VDD A10 A10 A11 A10 8 8 LCD VDD
WINCDCK_P B6 B6 B25 B25 WINCDCK_P LCD VSS2 A11 A11 A10 A11 7 7 LCD VSS2
WINCDCK_N B5 B5 B26 B26 WINCDCK_N LCD DISP OFF A12 A12 A9 A12 6 6 LCD DISP OFF
WINCDHSY_P B4 B4 B27 B27 WINCDHSY_P LCD D0 A13 A13 A8 A13 5 5 LCD D0
WINCDHSY_N B3 B3 B28 B28 WINCDHSY_N LCD D1 A14 A14 A7 A14 4 4 LCD D1
WINCDMRE_P B2 B2 B29 B29 WINCDMRE_P LCD D2 A15 A15 A6 A15 3 3 LCD D2
WINCDMRE_N B1 B1 B30 B30 WINCDMRE_N LCD D3 A16 A16 A5 A16 2 2 LCD D3
VEE OFF A17 A17 A4 A17 1 1 VEE OFF
5VPD A18 A18 A3 A18
YC5 TP_REM A19 A19 A2 A19
WINCS_DIN_RP7 A1 A1 A1 A1 WINCS_DIN_RP7 POWER2_LED A20 A20 A1 A20
WINCS_DIN_RP7 A2 A2 A2 A2 WINCS_DIN_RP7
5 WINCS_DIN_RP6 A3 A3 A3 A3 WINCS_DIN_RP6 CN3 5
WINCS_DIN_RN6 A4 A4 A4 A4 WINCS_DIN_RN6 DIG KEY_4 B20 B20 B1 B20 1 1 DIG KEY_4
WINCS_DIN_RP5 A5 A5 A5 A5 WINCS_DIN_RP5 DIG KEY_5 B19 B19 B2 B19 2 2 DIG KEY_5
WINCS_DIN_RN5 A6 A6 A6 A6 WINCS_DIN_RN5 DIG KEY_6 B18 B18 B3 B18 3 3 DIG KEY_6
WINCS_DIN_RP4 A7 A7 A7 A7 WINCS_DIN_RP4 DIG KEY_7 B17 B17 B4 B17 4 4 DIG KEY_7
WINCS_DIN_RN4 A8 A8 A8 A8 WINCS_DIN_RN4 DIG KEY_8 B16 B16 B5 B16 5 5 DIG KEY_8
WINCS_DIN_GP7 A9 A9 A9 A9 WINCS_DIN_GP7 DIG KEY_9 B15 B15 B6 B15 6 6 DIG KEY_9
WINCS_DIN_GN7 A10 A10 A10 A10 WINCS_DIN_GN7 SCAN_5 B14 B14 B7 B14 7 7 SCAN_5
WINCS_DIN_GP6 A11 A11 A11 A11 WINCS_DIN_GP6 SCAN_6 B13 B13 B8 B13 8 8 SCAN_6
WINCS_DIN_GN6 A12 A12 A12 A12 WINCS_DIN_GN6 SCAN_7 B12 B12 B9 B12 9 9 SCAN_7
WINCS_DIN_GP5 A13 A13 A13 A13 WINCS_DIN_GP5 SCAN_8 B11 B11 B10 B11 10 10 SCAN_8
WINCS_DIN_GN5 A14 A14 A14 A14 WINCS_DIN_GN5 DIG LED_7 B10 B10 B11 B10 11 11 DIG LED_7
WINCS_DIN_GP4 A15 A15 A15 A15 WINCS_DIN_GP4 DIG LED_8 B9 B9 B12 B9 12 12 DIG LED_8
WINCS_DIN_GN4 A16 A16 A16 A16 WINCS_DIN_GN4 5V B8 B8 B13 B8 13 13 5V
SGND A17 A17 A17 A17 SGND SGND B7 B7 B14 B7 14 14 SGND
SGND A18 A18 A18 A18 SGND LAMP OFF B6 B6 B15 B6 15 15 LAMP OFF
SGND A19 A19 A19 A19 SGND 24V B5 B5 B16 B5 16 16 24V
6 SGND A20 A20 A20
A21
A20
A21
SGND PGND B4 B4 B17 B4 17 17 PGND 6
SGND A21 A21 SGND SGND B3 B3 B18 B3 18 18 SGND
SGND A22 A22 A22 A22 SGND PH_LED B2 B2 B19 B2 19 19 PH_LED
SGND A23 A23 A23 A23 SGND PH_KEY B1 B1 B20 B1 20 20 PH_KEY
SGND A24 A24 A24 A24 SGND
DPMPWB
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-16
2FB/2FC
A B C D E F G H I J
MPWB
1 1
YC12 YC3 YC10 YC13 YC21 YC9
1 SGND 5V A1 1 SGND GND 1 1 DB_DATA7 PRT_SET A1
2 DIMM D0 INTA A2 2 D3 DQ0 2 2 DB_DATA6 SGND A2
3 DIMM D1 INTC A3 3 D4 DQ1 3 3 DB_DATA5 SIE2P A3
4 DIMM D2 5V A4 4 D5 DQ2 4 4 DB_DATA4 SCLKN A4
5 DIMM D3 5V A5 5 D6 VCC 5 5 DB_DATA3 SBSY A5
6 VCC1 SGND A6 6 D7 DQ3 6 6 DB_DATA2 SOP2E A6
7 DIMM D4 PCI RST A7 7 -CE1 DQ4 7 7 DB_DATA1 _RESET_PRT A7
8 DIMM D5 5V A8 8 A10 DQ5 8 8 DB_DATA0 PID0 A8
9 DIMM D6 PCI GNT1 A9 9 -OE DQ6 9 9 DB_MRE SGND A9
10 DIMM D7 SGND A10 10 A9 DQ7 10 10 DB_HSYNC PID3 A10
11 DQM0 PCI AD30 A11 11 A8 GND 11 11 DB_VSYNC SGND A11
2 12 SGND 3.3V A12 12 A7 A2 12 12 DB_CLK PID6 A12 2
13 DIMM A0 PCI AD28 A13 13 3.3V A3 13 13 5VPD SGND A13
14 DIMM A2 PCI AD26 A14 14 A6 A4 14 14 GND MRDYN A14
15 DIMM A3 SGND A15 15 A5 A5 15 PMRE A15
PRINTER BOARD
16 DIMM A4 PCI AD24 A16 16 A4 RY/BYN 16 SGND A16
17 DIMM A5 IDSEL A17 17 A3 A6 17 PRT_REQN A17
18 DIMM A10 3.3V A18 18 A2 A7 18 N.C(ID0) A18
19 BA1 PCI AD22 A19 19 A1 A8 19 TOSI A19
20 DIMM A12 PCI AD20 A20 20 A0 A9 20 +5V A20
21 VCC2 SGND A21 21 D0 GND 21 +3.3V B1
22 NC PCI AD18 A22 22 D1 DQ8 22 +3.3V B2
23 NC PCI AD16 A23 23 D2 DQ9 23 +3.3V B3
24 NC 3.3V A24 24 WP DQ10 24 SDIR B4
25 CK0 FRAME A25 25 -CD2 DQ11 25 ENGIRN B5
3 3
CF
26 SGND SGND A26 26 CD1 DQ12 26 POVSCN B6
27 CKE0 TRDY A27 27 D11 DQ13 27 N.C B7
28 -WE SGND A28 28 D12 DQ14 28 PID1 B8
29 -CSM0 STOP A29 29 D13 DQ15 29 PID2 B9
30 -CSM1 3.3V A30 30 D14 VCC 30 PID3 B10
31 VCC3 PCI SDONE A31 31 D15 A10 31 PID5 B11
32 NC PCI B0 A32 32 -CE2 A11 32 PID7 B12
33 NC SGND A33 33 -VS1 A12 33 PRTCLK B13
CODE DIMM
34 NC PAR A34 34 -IORD WPN 34 SGND B14
35 NC PCI AD15 A35 35 -IOWD DQ16 35 +3.3V B15
36 SGND 3.3V A36 36 -WE DQ17 36 CN18 +3.3V B16
37 DQM2 PCI AD13 A37 37 RDY/BSY DQ18 37 1 RESET +3.3V B17
38 DIMM D16 PCI AD11 A38 38 3.3V DQ19 38 2 GDRESET +3.3V B18
39 DIMM D17 SGND A39 39 -CSEL GND 39 3 3.3V +3.3V B19
4 40 DIMM D18 PCI AD9 A40 40 -VS2 OEN 40 4 GDBGE +5V B20 4
41 DIMM D19 C_BE0 A41 41 RESET CE1N 41 5 GSDI
42 VCC4 3.3V A42 42 -WAIT CE2N 42 6 SGND
43 DIMM D20 PCI AD6 A43 43 -INPACK A13 43 7 GDCLK
44 DIMM D21 PCI AD4 A44 44 -REG A14 44 8 SGND
45 DIMM D22 SGND A45 45 BVD2 CLE 45 9 GPCST[0]
46 DIMM D23 PCI AD2 A46 46 BVD1 ALE 46 10 SGND
NETWORK
47
48
SGND
SDA
PCI AD0
5V
A47
A48
SCANNER 47
48
D8
D9
WEN
VCC
47
48
11
12
GPCST[1]
SGND
49 SCL 5V A49 49 D10 DQ20 49 13 GPCST[2]
DIMM
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-17
2FB/2FC-2.0
A B C D E F G H I J
DCPSPWB
ACPSPWB
B3 B9 B3 B9 FEED MOT MODE 5 SG (DF) 11 11 A4
3 B2 B10 B2 B10 FUSER MOT ALM
YC11 SG (DF) 12 12 A3 3
B1 B11 B1 B11 FUSER MOT REM PGND 4 4 9 1 RELAY SOURCE SG (DF) 13 13 A2
DLP FAN R REM 2 2 8 2 RELAY REM SG (DF) 14 14 A1
Fuser unit 7 3 ZEROCROSS REM
PGND(N.C) 28 28 WE 6 4 CS HEATER REM 1 1 C1
RD
R24V 25 25 4 1 FH-L 3 C3 BK 5 5 M HEATER REM 2 2 C2
BK
POTENTIAL SENS SIG 24 24 3 2
PTS
FH-M WE 4 C4 WE 4 6 L HEATER REM DCPS 3 3 C3
YC3 SGND 27 27 2 3
FTS FH-S BK 6 C6 BK
3 7 S HEATER REM
A13 A1 A13 A1 SGND PGND 26 26 1 4 HEATER LIVE 1 BK 1 C1 BK 2 8 PWB 1 1 C3
A12 A2 A12 A2 DK SDI PGND 1 2 HEATER LIVE 2 2 C2 1 9 PFAN REM 2 2 C2
A11 A3 A11 A3 DK SDO COOL FAN3 REM
29
31
29
31 2 1 CFM3 3 3 C1
A10 A4 A10 A4 DK SCLK(O) YC12 YC15
1 1 1 1 R24V 14 1
A9 A5 A9 A5 DK RDY(I) LSU FAN REM 32 32 1 WEBSOL 3 3 2 2 FIX WEBSOL REM
SG (SF)
SG (SF)
1
2
1
2 13 2
A6
DKPWB A8
A7
A6
A7
A8
A7
A6
A7
DK SEL(O)
FEED B SW
2
3
2
1
1
2 LSUFM SG (SF) 3 3 12 3
A5
A4
4 YC2 A6
A5
A8
A9
A6
A5
A8
A9
MP SOL PULL PGND 30 30 5
1 1 5 A2 6 1 3 4 FIX TH M SIG
SG (SF)
SG (SF)
4
5
4
5
11
10
4
5
A3
A2 Optional 4
MP SOL RTN 6 2 1 2 1
SFM FTH-M 2 2 4 A3 5 2 4 4 SGND SG (SF) 6 6 9 6
A4 A10 A4 A10 MP SET SW SIG 7 1 2 1 2
1 1 3 A4 4 3 5 5 FIX TH S SIG
A1
side
A3 A11 A3 A11 MP PSD SW SIG YC17 FTH-S 2 A5 3 4
A2
A1
A12
A13
A2
A1
A12
A13
MP TRY SW SIG
CONT SENS
R24V 1 1 5 1 1 1
2 2
4 B3 2 5
6
7
6
7
SGND
CONVEY U SET SIG
SG (SF)
SG (SF)
7
8
7
8
8
7
7
8
B8
B7
feeder
PGND 2 2 4 2 2 2 3 B4 1 6 8 8 SGND STOP (SF) 9 9 6 9 B6
B13 B1 B13 B1 SGND PLG REM
PLG READY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
PM OP SDO (SF) 10 10 5 10 B5
B12 B2 (A) B12 B2 FAN STOP
PLG CLK 5 5 1 5 5 5 3 3 1 3
OP SDI (SF) 11 11 4 11 B4
B11 B3 B11 B3 MAIN MOT ALM 9 9 SGND SF RDY 12 12 3 12 B3
B10 B4 B10 B4 MAIN MOT REM SBESW 2
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
10 10 SB EJ SW SIG SF SEL 13 13 2 13 B2
B9 B5 B9 B5 MP MOT CWB 11 11 5V OP SCLK (SF) 14 14 1 14 B1
DKPWB B8
B7
B6
B7
B8
B7
B6
B7
MP MOT MODE
MP MOT HLD
N.C. 15 15
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-18
2FB/2FC-2.0
A B C D E F G H I J
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-19
2FB/2FC
A B C D E F G H I J
YC1
YC2-3 YC3-2 1 1 R24V YC6
YC3-5 YC2-4 2 2 PGND MP MOT /A 1 14 1 6
1 DCPSPWB YC6-8 YC4-14 3 3 SGND 24V 2 13 2 5 1
YC5-3 YC5-16 4 4 5V MP MOT A 3 12 3 4
MP MOT B 4 11 4 3 MPFDM
YC2 24V 5 10 5 2
A13 A1 A13 A1 CONT SENS MP MOT /B 6 9 6 1
A12 A2 A12 A2 MP TRY SW TONER MOT /B 7 8 4 1
A11 A3 A11 A3 MP PSD SW TONER MOT /A 8 7 1 4
A10 A4 A10 A4 MP PE SW TONER MOT B 9 6 3 2 TM
A9 A5 A9 A5 MP SOL RTN TONER MOT A 10 5 2 3
A8 A6 A8 A6 MP SOL PUL
SGND 11 4 1 2 1 2
A7
A6
A7
A8
A7
A6
A7
A8
FEED B SW
DK SEL(I) CONTENA SET 12 3 2 1 2 1 TCDSW
DEV REM 13 2 1 2
A5
A4
A9
A10
A5
A4
A9
A10
DK RDY(O)
DK SCLK(I) DEV R24V 14 1 2 1 DEVDFM
2 A3 A11 A3 A11 DK SDO 2
YC11
EPWB A2 A12 A2 A12 DK SDI
MAIN MOT CLK 1 1 9 9
A1 A13 A1 A13 SGND
YC3 B1 B13 B1 B13 SGND MAIN MOT ALM
MAIN MOT REM
2
3
2
3
8
7
8
7
B2 B12 B2 B12 DEV FAN REM
5V 4 4 6 6
B3 B11 B3 B11 MAIN MOT ALM
B4 B10 B4 B10 MAIN MOT REM
SGND 5 5 5 5 DM
PGND 6 6 4 4
B5 B9 B5 B9 MP MOT CW
PGND 7 7 3 3
B6 B8 B6 B8 MP MOT MODE 24V 8 8 2 2
B7 B7 B7 B7 MP MOT HLD 24V 9 9 1 1
B8 B6 B8 B6 MP MOT REM
B9 B5 B9 B5 MP MOT CLK
B10 B4 B10 B4 MP DIG2
3 B11
B12
B3
B2
B11
B12
B3
B2
MP DIG1
MP DIG0
3
B13 B1 B13 B1 CONT SET SW Paper conveying unit
YC3 YC7
3 3 1 12 1 1 SGND A10 A1 3 3
SGND A1 A1
CAS1LS1 2 2 2 11 2 2 LCF1 SW1
5V
LCF SW B A2 A2 A9 A2 2 2 DCSW2
1 1 3 10 3 3 5V A3 A3 A8 A3 1 1
3 3 4 9 4 4 SGND SGND A4 A4 A7 A4 3 3
CAS1LS2 2 2 5 8 5 5 LCF1 SW2
5V
LCF SW A A5 A5 A6 A5 2 2 DCSW1
1 1 6 7 6 6 5V A6 A6 A5 A6 1 1
3 3 7 6 7 7 SGND SGND A7 A7 A4 A7
CAS1LS3 2 2 8 5 8 8 LCF1 SW3 LCF SET A8 A8 A3 A8
1 1 9 4 9 9 5V SGND A9 A9
3 3 10 3 10 10 SGND N.C A10 A10
4 CAS1DS 2 2 11 2 11 11 LCF1 SW4 5V A11 A11 A2 A9 8 1 1 1 4
1 1 12 1 12 12 5V LCF SW A1 A12 A12 A1 A10 7 2 2 2 TIMSW1
2 2 13 13 LIFT MOT1 L 3 3
LFM1 1 1 14 14 LIFT MOT1 H 5V B12 B12 B1 B12 1 8 1 1
PE SW2 B11 B11 B2 B11 2 7 2 2 PESW2
SGND B10 B10 B3 B10 3 6 3 3
5V B9 B9 B4 B9 4 5 1 1
LIM SW2 B8 B8 B5 B8 5 4 2 2 LILSW2
SGND B7 B7 B6 B7 6 3 3 3
5V B6 B6 B7 B6 1 6 1 1
YC10
3 3 1 12 1 1 SGND
PE SW1 B5 B5 B8 B5 2 5 2 2 PESW1
SGND B4 B4 B9 B4 3 4 3 3
CAS2LS1 2 2 2 11 2 2 LCF2 SW1 5V B3 B3 B10 B3 4 3 1 1
1 1 3 10 3 3 5V LIM SW1 B2 B2 B11 B2 5 2 2 2 LILSW1
5 3 3 4 9 4 4 SGND SGND B1 B1 B12 B1 6 1 3 3 5
CAS2LS2 2 2 5 8 5 5 LCF2 SW2
1 1 6 7 6 6 5V 1
3 3 7 6 7 7 SGND 2
CAS2LS3 2 2 8 5 8 8 LCF2 SW3 3
1 1 9 4 9 9 5V 4
3 3 10 3 10 10 SGND 5
CAS2DS 2 2 11 2 11 11 LCF2 SW4 6
1 1 12 1 12 12 5V 7
2 2 13 13 LIFT MOT2 L 8
LFM2 1 1 14 14 LIFT MOT2 H
15 15 N.C YC8
PF MOT1 /A 1 10 12 12 6 6
R24V 2 9 11 11 5 5
6 PF MOT1 A 3 8 10 10 4 4 6
PF MOT1 B 4 7 9 9 3 3 PFM1
YC4 R24V 5 6 8 8 2 2
3 3 1 1 SGND PF MOT1 /B 6 5 7 7 1 1
FSW2 2 2 2 2 FEED B SW
PF MOT2 A 7 4
6
5 5
6
2 3
1 1 3 3 5V
PF MOT2 B 8 3 4 4 3 2
PF MOT2 /A 9 2 3 3 1 4 PFM2
PF MOT2 /B 10 1 2 2 4 1
1 1
YC5
MP unit 1 3 10 1 A9 A1 24V
MPSOL 2 2 9 2 A8 A2 MP SOL PUL
3 1 8 3 A7 A3 MP SOL RTN
7 1 1 6 5 A6 A4 5V 7
MPPESW 2 2 5 6 A5 A5 MP PE SW
3 3 4 7 A4 A6 SGND
3 1 3 8 A3 A7 5V
TCS 2 2 2 9 A2 A8 CONT SENS
1 3 1 10 A1 A9 SGND
3 3 1 9 B1 B9 5V
MPPLSW 2
1
2
1
2
3
8
7
B5
B3
B5
B7
MP PSD SW
GND
DKPWB
2 4 6 B4 B6 GND
MPTSW 1 5 5 B2 B8 MP TRY SW
4 6 4 B6 B4 MP DIG0
3 7 3 B7 B3 MP DIG1
8 MPPWSW 2 8 2 B8 B2 MP DIG2 8
1 9 1 B9 B1 GND
5
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-20
2FB/2FC
A B C D E F G H I J
1 1
YC1 YC5
YC3-5 1 1 24V LIFT3 ESW 2 A1 A1 5 5
YC2-3 2 2 PGND SGND A2 A2 4 4
DCPSPWB YC4-15 3 3 SGND LIFT3 ESW 1 A3 A3 3 3 LIM3
YC5-14 4 4 5V LIFT MOT3 L A4 A4 2 2
2 LIFT MOT3 H A5 A5 1 1 2
LIFT4 ESW 2 A6 A6 5 5
YC2 SGND A7 A7 4 4
3 1 14 1 5V LIFT4 ESW 1 A8 A8 3 3 LIM4
WTS 2 2 13 2 DISPOSL SIG(I) LIFT MOT4 L A9 A9 2 2
1 3 12 3 SGND LIFT4 MOT4 H A10 A10 1 1
11 1 11 4 DISPOSL SIG(O)
10 2 10 5 CS SEL (I)
9 3 9 6 CS RDY (O)
8 4 8 7 CS CLK (I)
EPWB 7 5 7 8 CS SDO YC5
SGND A11 A11 2 1 2 2
YC4
6
5
6
7
6
5
9
10
CS SDI
CS PAUSE PSD SW3 A12 A12 1 2 1 1 PLSW1
4 8 4 11 TFR MOT REM SGND B2 B2 2 1 2 2
3 3 9 3 12 TFR MOT ALM PSD SW4 B3 B3 1 2 1 1 PLSW2 3
2 10 2 13 SGND N.C B1 B1
1 11 1 14 SGND
YC5
GND B4 B4 6 1 3 3
FSW C B5 B5 5 2 2 2 FSW3
5V B6 B6 4 3 1 1
YC3 GND B7 B7 3 4 3 3
5
4
5
4
1
2
1
2
TFR MOT CLK
TFR MOT ALM
FSW D B8 B8 2 5 2 2 FSW4
5V B9 B9 1 6 1 1
3 3 3 3 TFR MOT REM GND B10 B10 3 1 3 3
TRM 4 4 5V FSW E B11 B11 2 2 2 2 FSW5
5 5 PGND 5V B12 B12 1 3 1 1
4 2 2 6 6 PGND 4
1 1 7 7 R24V
YC4
1 7 7 21 21 5V
TIMSW2 2
3
12 12 23 23 FEED D1 SW
1 1 11 11 SGND
3 25 25 SGND
5 PESW3 2 2 2 9 9 PE SW3 5
1 3 3 7 7 5V
3 4 4 5 5 SGND YC6
LILSW3 2 5 5 3 3 LMT SW3 VF MOT /A 6 6 1 6
1 6 6 1 1 5V 24V 5 5 2 5
YC6 VF MOT A 4 4 3 4
1 4 11 11 14 14 PF MOT3 /B VF MOT B 3 3 4 3 VFDM
4 1 10 10 13 13 PF MOT3 /A 24V 2 2 5 2
PFM3 2 3 9 9 12 12 PF MOT3 B VF MOT /B 1 1 6 1
Cassette 3 3 2 8 8 11 11 PF MOT3 A
YC7
5V 1
6 VPP 2 6
YC4 FSDO(I) 3
1 7 7 22 22 5V FSDI(O) 4
TIMSW3 2
3
12 12 24 24 FEED E1 SW N.C
FRSETN
5
6
1 1 12 12 SGND
3 26 26 SGND SGND 7
PESW4 2
1
2 2 10 10 PE SW4
3 3 8 8 5V
3 4 4 6 6 SGND
LILSW4 2 5 5 4 4 LMT SW4
YC4
1 6 6 2 2 5V
1 4 11 11 10 10
YC6
PF MOT4 /B
CSPWB CS3 DIG0
CS3 DIG1
19
17
19
17
3
4
5
6
4
3
PWSW1
CS3 DIG2 15 15 1 7 2
7 4 1 10 10 9 9 PF MOT4 /A SGND 13 13 2 8 1 7
PFM4 2 3 9 9 8 8 PF MOT4 B CS4 DIG0 20 20 3 5 4
Cassette 4 3 2 8 8 7 7 PF MOT4 A CS4 DIG1 18 18 4 6 3
PWSW2
CS4 DIG2 16 16 1 7 2
SGND 14 14 2 8 1
8 8
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-21
2FB/2FC
A B C D E F G H I J
1 1
YC1 YC7 6 1 3
YC3-3 1 1 R24V DUP CONV SW B 5 5 A4 A11 5 2 2 DUPCSW2
YC2-5 2 2 PGND 4 3 1
DCPSPWB YC4-13 3 3 SGND 3 4 3
YC5-15 4 4 5V DUP CONV SW C 7 7 A2 A13 2 5 2 DUPCSW3
1 6 1
7 1 2 3
6 2 3 2
5 3 1 4 DUPSRM
YC2 4 4 4 1
2 A11 A1 A11 A1 EJECT SW 3 5 3 2
A10 A2 A10 A2 FEED A SW DUP SIDE REG SW 11 11 B10 B5 2 6 2 DUPSRSW
A9 A3 A9 A3 REG SW 1 7 1
A8 A4 A8 A4 N.C
A7 A5 A7 A5 DUP PAUSE 3 1 3
A6
A5
A6
A7
A6
A5
A6
A7
DUP SEL(O)
DUP RDY(I)
DUP CONV SW A 3 3 B12 B3 2 2 2 DUPCSW1
1 3 1
A4 A8 A4 A8 DUP SCLK(O)
A3 A9 A3 A9 DUP SDO 3 1 3
A2
A1
A10
A11
A2
A1
A10
A11
DUP SDI
SGND
DUP JAM SW 9 9 A6 A9 2 2 2 DUPJSW
1 3 1
EPWB B1 B11 B1 B11 SGND DUP SB SOL ATC 16 16 C4 C4 3 3
YC2 B2
B3
B10
B9
B2
B3
B10
B9
REG MOT CLK
REG MOT REM
DUP SB SOL PUL 14 14 C2 C2 1 1 DUPSBSOL
24V 18 18 C3 C3 2 2
3 B4 B8 B4 B8 REG MOT HLD SGND 12 12 C1 C1
3
B5 B7 B5 B7 REG MOT MODE 3 3 3
B6
B7
B6
B5
B6
B7
B6
B5
FEED MOT CLK
FEED MOT REM
DUP FEED SW 1 1 B14 B1 2 2 2 DUPFSW
1 1 1
B8 B4 B8 B4 FEED MOT HLD
B9 B3 B9 B3 FEED MOT MODE
B10 B2 B10 B2 FUSER MOT ALM DUP SOL (RESERVE) 4 4 B11 B4
B11 B1 B11 B1 FUSER MOT REM DUP SOL (RESERVE) 2 2 B13 B2
24V 10 10 A5 A10
8 8
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-22
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
A
CIS
Wiring diagram No.9
SHDPWB
To
4
3
2
1
9
7
5
3
1
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
B
B
SHDPWB YC2
YC14
YC11
1 5V
1 5V
8
6
4
2
7 SG
4 FSI
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
4 N.C
2 TxD
3 RxD
5 N.C.
2 VPP
3 FSO
To SPWB
OLSW
5 SGND
OSSW
6 FRSTN
SPWB
OWSW
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
SGND/5V
YC1
5V/WREST
WSDO/WSDI
WSEL/WRDY
+A24V/SGND
1 2 24V/24V AGND/+A24V
1
2
RGOUT/AGND
3 4 24V/+A24V
RGLD/RGRDWR
RGDATA/RGCLK
C
C
PLLSEL1/WSCLK
OVMONOUT/N.C.
5 6 +A24V/PG
PAGEST/PLLSEL0
7 8 PG/PG
26 9 10 5V/5V
25 11 12 SG/SG YC8
1
2
24 13 14 AGND/AGND 5V(ORGL) 1
23 15 16 SSCLK/SSDO ORIG.LSW 2
2
1
17 18 SSDI/SSEL GND(ORGL) 3
19 20 SRDY/OVSYNC 5V(ORGW) 4
21 22 TMG2/FEED ORGW 5
D
D
YC12
YC9
OFSW
ORSW
1 24V
DPTSW1
5V(W1) 1
2 INV REM
W1SW 2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3 PGND
GND(W1) 3
5V(W2) 4
YC15 W2SW 5
2 1 24V GND(W2) 6
1 2 FAN REM
1
2
3
E
E
3
2
1
3
2
1
YC7
1
2
3
1
2
3
5V(FD) 1
FDSW 2
GND(FD) 3
DPMPWB
DPINPWB
5V(REG) 4
DPSSW2
DPSSW1 REGSW 5
4
3
2
1
GND(REG) 6
5V(TMG1) 7
N.O
TMG1SW 8
N.O
F
F
COM
COM
2 GND(TMG1) 9
1
2
1
5V(TMG2) 10 1 3
2
1 YC10 TMG2SW 11 2 2
3
2
1
1
2
1 24V GND(TMG2) 12 3 1
2 N.C
3 24V DPOPNSW
4 24V
5 N.C
CIS
3
2
1
3
2
1
YC13
6 24V COVOPNSW
DPFM
5V(CISOPN) 1
G CISOPNSW 2
G
SGND(CISOPN) 3
YC4
DPTSW2
5 2 1 RMCOMA
CISOCSW
2 5 2 RMCOMB
YC6
4 3 3 RMA
5V(SET) 1 1 4
ORM
1 6 4 RM_A
SET.SW 2 2 3
6 1 5 RMB
GND(SET) 3 3 2
3 4 6 RM_B
GND(SET) 4 4 1
5 7 CCOMA
5V(LH) 5
2 8 CCOMB
H
H
LHSW 6
4 9 CMA
GND(LH) 7
6 10 CMB
OCM
5V(LL) 8
1 11 CM_A
LLSW 9
3 12 CM_B
LM_A 9
LMB 8
LMA 7
FM_B 6
FM_A 5
FMB 4
FMA 3
FMCOMB 2
FMCOMA 1
RED 3
GND 2
GREEN 1
GND(LL) 10
YC3
YC5
1 LM_B 10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I
I
4
2
3
1
1
6
3
4
2
5
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
OFM
DPLIM
LEDPWB
DPLLLSW
DPLULSW
J
J
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2FB/2FC
2-4-23
2FB/2FC-2.0
A B C D E F G H I J
1 1
2 2
3 FMDPWB 3
1 10 2-10
YC1 2 2 2-2 DCPSPWB
24V 1 1 3
1 9-1
5 2 9-2 EPWB
6
4 GND 2 2 7 4
YC2
COOLING FAN 1 1 12 5 11 1 2
GND 2 11 6 10 2 1 CFM1
COOLING FAN 2 3 10 7 9 1 2
GND 4 9 8 8 2 1 CFM2
5 5
DLP FAN F1 9 4 1 15 3 3 20 20 1 2
GND 10 3 2 14 4 2 8 8 2 1 DEVFM1
DLP FAN F2 11 2 3 13 5 1 9 9 2 1
GND 12 1 1 2 DEVFM2
Imaging unit
PCB FAN 2 5 8 1 3
GND 6 7 3 1 PWBFM1
PCB FAN 1 7 6 1 2
GND 8 5 2 1 PWBFM2
6 6
7 7
8 8
A B C D E F G H I J
2-4-24